Volume 5, Issue 10(5), October 2016
International Journal of Multidisciplinary Educational Research
Published by Sucharitha Publications 8-43-7/1, Chinna Waltair Visakhapatnam – 530 017 Andhra Pradesh – India Email:
[email protected] Website: www.ijmer.in
Editorial Board Editor-in-Chief Dr.K. Victor Babu Faculty, Department of Philosophy Andhra University – Visakhapatnam - 530 003 Andhra Pradesh – India
EDITORIAL BOARD MEMBERS Prof. S.Mahendra Dev
Prof. Fidel Gutierrez Vivanco
Vice Chancellor Indira Gandhi Institute of Development Research Mumbai
Founder and President Escuela Virtual de Asesoría Filosófica Lima Peru
Prof.Y.C. Simhadri Vice Chancellor, Patna University Former Director Institute of Constitutional and Parliamentary Studies, New Delhi & Formerly Vice Chancellor of Benaras Hindu University, Andhra University Nagarjuna University, Patna University
Prof. (Dr.) Sohan Raj Tater Former Vice Chancellor Singhania University, Rajasthan
Prof.K.Sreerama Murty Department of Economics Andhra University - Visakhapatnam
Prof. K.R.Rajani Department of Philosophy Andhra University – Visakhapatnam
Prof. P.D.Satya Paul Department of Anthropology Andhra University – Visakhapatnam
Prof. Josef HÖCHTL Department of Political Economy University of Vienna, Vienna & Ex. Member of the Austrian Parliament Austria
Prof. Alexander Chumakov Chair of Philosophy Russian Philosophical Society Moscow, Russia
Prof. Igor Kondrashin The Member of The Russian Philosophical Society The Russian Humanist Society and Expert of The UNESCO, Moscow, Russia
Dr. Zoran Vujisiæ Rector St. Gregory Nazianzen Orthodox Institute Universidad Rural de Guatemala, GT, U.S.A
Prof.U.Shameem Department of Zoology Andhra University Visakhapatnam
Dr. N.V.S.Suryanarayana Dept. of Education, A.U. Campus Vizianagaram
Dr. Kameswara Sharma YVR Asst. Professor Dept. of Zoology Sri. Venkateswara College, Delhi University, Delhi
I Ketut Donder Depasar State Institute of Hindu Dharma Indonesia
Prof. Roger Wiemers Professor of Education Lipscomb University, Nashville, USA
Dr. N.S. Dhanam Department of Philosophy Andhra University Visakhapatnam
Dr.B.S.N.Murthy
Dr.Ton Quang Cuong
Department of Mechanical Engineering GITAM University Visakhapatnam
Dean of Faculty of Teacher Education University of Education, VNU, Hanoi
Dr.S.V Lakshmana Rao Coordinator A.P State Resource Center Visakhapatnam
Prof. Chanakya Kumar Department of Computer Science University of Pune,Pune
Prof. Djordje Branko Vukelic
Dr.S.Kannan Department of History Annamalai University Annamalai Nagar, Chidambaram
Dr. B. Venkataswamy H.O.D., & Associate Professor Dept. of Telugu, P.A.S. College Pedanandipadu, Guntur, India
Department for Production Engineering University of Novi Sad, Serbia
Prof. Shobha V Huilgol Department of Pharmacology Off- Al- Ameen Medical College, Bijapur
Prof.Joseph R.Jayakar
Dr.E. Ashok Kumar
Department of English GITAM University Hyderabad
Department of Education North- Eastern Hill University, Shillong
Prof.Francesco Massoni
Dr.K.Chaitanya Department of Chemistry Nanjing University of Science and Technology People’s Republic of China
Dr.Merina Islam Department of Philosophy Cachar College, Assam
Department of Public Health Sciences University of Sapienza, Rome
Prof.Mehsin Jabel Atteya Al-Mustansiriyah University College of Education Department of Mathematics, Iraq
Prof. Ronato Sabalza Ballado
Dr. Bipasha Sinha
Department of Mathematics University of Eastern Philippines, Philippines
S. S. Jalan Girls’ College University of Calcutta, Calcutta
Dr.Senthur Velmurugan .V
Prof. N Kanakaratnam Dept. of History, Archaeology & Culture Dravidian University, Kuppam Andhra Pradesh Dr. K. John Babu Department of Journalism & Mass Comm Central University of Kashmir, Kashmir
Dr.T.V.Ramana Department of Economics, Andhra University Campus, Kakinada
Librarian Kalasalingam University Krishnankovil Tamilnadu Dr.J.B.Chakravarthi Assistant Professor Department of Sahitya Rasthritya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, Tirupati Prof. R. Siva Prasadh Institute of Advanced Studies in Education Andhra University, Visakhapatnam
® © Editor-in-Chief, IJMER Typeset and Printed in India www.ijmer.in IJMER, Journal of Multidisciplinary Educational Research, concentrates on critical and creative research in multidisciplinary traditions. This journal seeks to promote original research and cultivate a fruitful dialogue between old and new thought.
CONTENTS Volume 5 S. No 1.
Issue 10(5)
October 2016
The Ideology Behind the Occurrence of Ricefield Land Conversion at the Sub-District of Southern Denpasar Gede Wirata
Page No 1
2.
Indian Telecommunications: A Rural Urban Comparison Manpreet Kaur
19
3.
The Analysis on the Uniqueness of Spiritual Healing as Product Differentiation in the Bali Tourism I Gede Sutarya and I Nyoman Sirtha
28
4.
A Critical Review on Sedition
44 K.Chandrasekhara Rao
5.
A Study of Causes of HIV-AIDS Challenges in Indian Context with Emphasis on Women Related Issues S.Sreenivasa Rao
52
6.
Understanding of Human being According to Gandhi A.V.Krishna Rao
69
7.
Problems of Working Women in the Banking Sector – A Study in Guntur District Vani Vuyyuri
80
8.
Analytical Study on Irrigation Facilities in Prakasm District of Andhra Pradesh G.Somasekhara
90
9.
Self-Efficacy and Classroom Management Ravindranath K. Murthy
99
10.
The Fate of the Universe in the Quranic Perspective Abul Hassan Chaudhury
109
11.
Financial Inclusion & Performance of Rural Banks in J&K Javeed Iqbal and Firdous Ahmad Qazi
122
12.
A Study of Mobile Phone Usage by College Students Kusum Sajwan Negi and Sunita Godiyal
134
13.
Demographic and Educational Status of Scheduled Castes P.Ramadevi
143
14.
Influence of Mind Mapping as a Strategy in Teaching IX Standard Geography of Social Sciences V. Ramakrishna
173
15.
Facets of Social Work with Changing Faces: Towards Indigenous Visibility Venkatesha Murthy. S
182
16.
Women’s Emancipation and Empowerment Tapash Mohanta and Jhumu Saha
204
17.
Women Empowerment - Ancient to Modern C.S.Sukumar Reddy and Y. Raja Sekhar
208
18.
Moving Object Detection Using BMA G.Sharmila Sujatha and V.Valli Kumari
213
19.
Impact of Subject on Political Awareness of Social Studies and Science Teachers of Secondary Schools G.Varalaxmi
230
20.
A Critical Review on the History and Evolution of ‘GAY’ K.Chandrasekhara Rao
238
Dr. K. VICTOR BABU M.A.,M.A.,M.Phil.,Ph.D.,PDF, (D.Lit) Faculty of Philosophy and Religious Studies & Editor-in-Chief International Journal of Multidisciplinary Educational Research (IJMER) & Sucharitha: A Journal of Philosophy and Religion Andhra University, Visakhapatnam Pin - 530 003 , Andhra Pradesh – India
ISSN : 2277 – 7881 Impact Factor :4.527(2016) Index Copernicus Value: 5.16
Editorial…… You will be happy to know that we have entered the fifth year of publication of IJMER, since its inception in April 2012. Focusing on many interdisciplinary subjects, the published papers are spreading the knowledge with fervent hope of upholding the holistic approach. With all my heart, I reiterate to echo my sincere feelings and express my profound thanks to each and every valued contributor. This journal continues to nurture and enhance the capabilities of one and all associated with it. We as a team with relentless efforts are committed to inspire the readers and achieve further progress. Aim is to sustain the tempo and improve. We acknowledge with pleasure that our readers are enjoying the publications of Sucharitha Publishers. We solicit to receive ideas and comments for future improvements in its content and quality. Editor –in-Chief explicitly conveys his gratitude to all the Editorial Board members. Your support is our motivation. Best wishes to everyone.
Dr.K.Victor Babu Editor-in-Chief
SOCIAL SCIENCES, HUMANITIES, COMMERCE & MANAGEMENT, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY, MEDICINE, SCIENCES, ART & DEVELOPMENT STUDIES, LAW
www.ijmer.in
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
THE IDEOLOGY BEHIND THE OCCURRENCE OF RICEFIELD LAND CONVERSION AT THE SUB-DISTRICT OF SOUTHERN DENPASAR Gede Wirata Lecture in Ngurah Rai of University Denpasar Abstract The study aimed to understand the ideology that works behind the land conversion in Bali, especially in the Southern Denpasar Sub-District. The conversion of wetland into non-agricultural land involves a very large dimensions. This is related to aspects of change in the economic, social, cultural, and political orientation of the society. The direction of change is directly or indirectly affect the shift in economic conditions, zoning of agriculture and agricultural development priorities of national territory which directly also helping people to take advantage of opportunities. Through research using critical ethnographic approach, various ideologies have been found behind the land conversion. Different interests owned by each party causes one party to control the other parties, so that the parties who have the weakest capital must be willing at the position of being controlled and getting various forms of pressure exerted by parties who have big capital. It was found in the study that the land conversion that occurred in Southern Denpasar Sub-District caused by the economic interests, fatalism in the lives of farmers, pragmatism and lifestyle. The increasing necessities of life, high cost of production, the post- harvest losses as a result of low prices, the seduction of capitalists to exchange wetland at a price which is considered high, and the granting of land conversion from the authorities have caused a massive scale of land conversion in the Sub-District of Southern Denpasar. If not properly controlled from the influence of hedonistic lifestyle, then the public will be caught in the trap of capitalism that trap farmers, so that the tragic fate will afflict the farming community itself. www.ijmer.in
1
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
Keywords: Ideology, Land Conversion, Ricefields, Farms INTRODUCTION Land conversion was widespread in line with the development policy that emphasizes the aspect of growth, through the ease of facility of investment, both to local and foreign investors, encouraging the ideology of capitalism and the market economy. Identity of the farmer communities that always think simple and live on agriculture, has now been taken away as a result of their defeat in the conflicts that occur within the colonial society. In this position, the marginalization of the farming communities is dominated by space and time due to the existence of the dominant powers, such as businesses, government, and capitalists. For the capitalists, all the thing or object can be used as capital to earn maximum profit. In difficult conditions to earn a decent living as a result of modernization, then each individual must compete in fulfilling their needs of life. As noted by Scott (1981) that for farmers, all forms of risk, no matter how small the risk that it will face, it is regarded as something harmful to their subsistence. The pressure as a result of the loss of crops, urging demands on the land needs for dwelling due to the increasing number of families, seduction of capitalists who purchase land at a price that is considered fantastic by the farmers, the land conversion is unavoidable. The capitalists in making land conversion generally use the excuses of developments that permitted by the government. The essence of development is actually an attempt to fulfill basic human needs, both individually and collectively, in ways that do not cause damage to both the social and natural environment. Development of a region as specified in the vision and mission of the WTO (in Anom, 2010: 5) suggests that sustainable development should be adhered to three principles: (1) ecological sustainability; (2) social and cultural continuity; and (3) the economic viability of both for the present and www.ijmer.in
2
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
future generation. However, in this case the development has been misused to be the factor of the conversion of paddy fields which lead to the marginalization of farmers in the Southern Denpasar Sub-District. As stated by one of the local residents in the Village of Sesetan, I Ketut Windya (55 years old), who complained about the attitude of the government and investors that did not involve the local people who own the rights to agriculture in the area, so that land conversion frequently have negative impacts for them. The phenomenon of land conversion in the community as presented above is in line with the notion of Peet and Hartwick (2009: 71) on the development of the hegemony of the apparatus that has the power to produce knowledge by creating political economy. The aim is to launch a specific project, which would provide economic benefits to certain circles that have huge capital, so it has implications for the profits for holders of power in the areas that experiencing the land conversion. Thus, the changes that occur as a result of the conversion of paddy fields into residential land or other functions in the Southern Denpasar Sub-District have resulted in various issues, namely the local community of farmers are experiencing marginalization. Reduced agricultural land impacts on the more limited opportunities to do business in the field of agriculture. Limitations of business development in the field of agriculture greatly affect the decline in farmers' income, which implies also to their inability to meet the various needs of life. The process of land conversion that occurred in Southern Denpasar Sub-District is interesting to observe, given the development that is supposed to improve the welfare of society, but in reality it creates problems, both on the economic, social and cultural aspects of the communities in the area. Therefore, in this paper, it is studied and narrated the ideology behind the occurrence of land conversion. Land conversion is always likely to involve the interests and the power games www.ijmer.in
3
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
(Wirawan, 2012: 306). Thus, understanding the land conversion that occurs in Southern Denpasar Sub-District of Bali Province should not be seen at the holistic relationship between the parties involved, but it needs also to consider the possibility of power relations that based on an ideology. The power relationships and or those related to certain interests, thereby potentially marginalize other groups, namely in this context: the farmers who are not visible in plain view and it therefore requires elaboration, in order to more clearly incomprehensible. Power held by the party that has either a strong economic, social, cultural, and political capitals that cause those who have limited capitals to be marginalized, even in their own area which is actually their arena and habitus. Based on this phenomenon, as presented by Widja (2014) that the main mission of Cultural Studies, which is based on the paradigm of critical theory in axiology is served to uncover the power games, interests and ideologies to realize emancipation. METHOD This research was conducted by using an ethnographic approach as one of the variants of a qualitative approach. As noted by Barker (2005), an ethnographic approach is empirical and theoretical approach, which aims to get a description and a thorough analysis of culture based on intensive field research, where ethnography is often associated with culturalist approaches and its emphasis is on daily life experience. In this study, the ethnographic approach aimed to understand the ideologies that work behind the occurrence of land conversion in the Sub-District of Southern Denpasar, Bali. DISCUSSION Economic Ideology Behind the Occurrence of Land Conversion In the Southern Denpasar Sub-District, Bali Province Land conversion can occur because of changes in spatial plans, the policy direction of development, and the market mechanisms. The www.ijmer.in
4
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
last two things happenned as a result of the keep changing spatial planning and the weak control mechanisms by the government to the land owners. As stated by Ni Putu Djuwita (56 years), in an interview, she mentioned that: ”I have rice fields in Pemogan and Sesetan, the one at Pemogan has been farmed out by the share cropper, we just receipt the yields, as a sharecrop. Meanwhile, I sold the piece of land in Sesetan, because of the high selling prices, it was also, many fellow land owners sold their land because of the high prices”. This situation would result in the declining farmers' income, plus the farming activities are considered less promising for a better future. Moreover, the young people in the area began to choose jobs in the service sector, or other formal sector which are considered more promising. The decreased agricultural land in Southern Denpasar SubDistrict, particularly in the Village of Pedungan has been widespread. Based on the interview above, the conversion of paddy fields into residential land or other functions impact on the living conditions of the farmers themselves. It has an impact on the economic conditions namely the reduced income (money), the role of the social, cultural value orientation, social stratification, and employment as well as business opportunities. Thus, the farmers in Southern Denpasar SubDistrict are in the oppressed position, as suggested by Gramsci (Ratna, 2013: 463) that the subaltern is the people who are oppressed and marginalized, the same phenomenon occurs in the farming communities of the Southern Denpasar Sub-District area. As a result of the marginalization is the increase of labor moving out of agriculture sector. Some of them tried to participate in the development that occurred in the area as construction workers, but it is difficult because of the influx of workers from the island of Java, who offer their services with relatively low wages. The massive exodus from Java to Bali, especially the construction workers, which directly affect the local residents in getting www.ijmer.in
5
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
side jobs. The local people of Southern Denpasar SubDistrict experienced difficulty in finding work in their own areas. It was because of the capital owners or developers who generally come from outside of Bali, directly bring their own workers or laborers. In addition that the outside or migrant labors are cheaper when compared to the local workers (interview with I Gede Puruhita, 54 years old). The rise development in Southern Denpasar Sub-District has resulted in social changes in the society. In line with the idea of Ratna (2013: 463) that farmers have become the subaltern or the other which makes the other groups to be different, whose status is lower, the case in the farming community in the Southern Denpasar Sub-District that the farmers are facing difficulties in their lives. On one side, when they maintained their jobs as a farmer, the narrower size of farming land causing profits generated is getting less and less, so that even the necessities of life can not be met properly. While the opportunity to become a construction worker is also limited. Marginalization due to the conversion of paddy fields is a rural phenomenon that causes distress and a certain characteristics of indigenous cultures, which are usually endured that indicates integral phenomenon in society. Marginalization carried out by a group of people through various forms of development, in practice the development process also shifts the values and norms that exist in society. The process of marginalization of communities began by the land acquisition, as explained by one of the people named I Wayan Nugraha (57 years old) that in practice the acquisitions of paddy fields in Southern Denpasar Sub-District often violated the green belt area and the local people did not dare to forbid it because it has been determined by the government , where the government as the regulator has given permission to the investors. Based on the Denpasar City Regulation Number 27 of 2011 clearly states that the area is a green open space that prohibit any www.ijmer.in
6
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
kinds of development. However, in practice the land conversion has been continuously occured, with the pretext of the issue of tourism in Bali. The non-compliance of the government of Badung to the applicable regulations is in accordance with the idea of Foucault in Latif (2005: 39) that describes the power in the state institutions. In this case it is found that there has been a game or conspiracy between authorities and entrepreneurs to acquire the area that can be used for business development properties through the hegemony of government power and businesses on the owners of land in the Southern Denpasar Sub-District. Tourism developers who need facilities and infrastructure have taken agricultural land and resulted in the changes in land use. Economic interests owned by corrupted government officials for the investors have made corrupted government officials made a variety of pressures on the people. They have the power as policy makers in cooperation with the entrepreneur as the owners of capitals in pressuring the land or the ricefields’ owners either legally or illegally for the purposes of the economy. The marginalization of farmers in the Southern Denpasar Sub-District evidenced by the actions of the entrepreneurs who have capital leveraging the power of the corrupted authorities to acquire land, both legally and illegally. Even in practice often done by repressive actions, as witnessed by one of the local people name I Wayan Sugeh (58 years), who revealed that the pressures they experienced have occurred since the reign of late President Suharto. Then followed by the government during the reign of Bali governor Ida Bagus Oka, who did the land conversion into a gas station in Sesetan area. Hegemony for economic purposes that occurred in the Southern Denpasar Sub-District was conducted through the discourse on the construction of residential areas, which was supported by the government. Hegemony was carried out by giving certain false promises to the people in the village of Southern Denpasar, which has a vision to www.ijmer.in
7
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
improve the welfare of the community through job creation and to provide adequate facilities and infrastructure for the community. But in fact, the economic benefits can only be enjoyed by those who have the capitals and powers. The false attitude of the government in maintaining its ideals is a form of pathological bureaucracy. Pathology of bureaucracy as proposed by Dwidjowijoto (2006: 84) is excessive marginal attitude, obey the rules or routines, and procedures, resistance to change, and shortsighted insistence on the rights of authority and status. In this case the owners of capital were clearly aiming to seek profits as much as possible, even are given more opportunity by the government which has economic interests of the investors. That phenomenon is certainly quite contrary to the vision and mission of the government that should be more concerned with the welfare of society. As noted by Keraf (2002: 192-194) that in order to realize the paradigm of the government administration itself should be conducted well, which requires four things: (1) The operation of good government requires that the government itself has to be really effective in governing. The government should be strong in the sense that it is able to resist various narrow political interests that intend to distort the power of government itself; (2) The Government shall be subject to the applicable legal rules. To ensure good governance, the government must comply with the applicable legal rules. There must be clear rules that can be hold together in organizing the common life which guarantees mutual interest; (3) The government stood upright as arbiter and guardian of existing laws guaranteeing the common interest of all the people. Government power must not be abused to violate the law in the interests of certain groups; and (4) It is necessary to guarantee on the elements of democratic institutions to function optimally and effectively. The instruments of such democratic institutions, among others, include independence, control, and balance www.ijmer.in
8
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
of power among the executive, judicial, and legislative branches. The executive and the judiciary must have the credibility and the integration of high morality and uphold truth and justice for all. While the legislature should be responsive to the aspirations and interests of the people. Fatalism in the Farmers Life and Its Implication of Land Conversion In the Sub-District of Southern Denpasar, Bali Fatalism is also known by the adjective fatalistic, which is defined as the absence of resistance and assume thart condition faced is a twist of fate (Priambodo, 2009: 21). If fatalism is associated with this study, the fatalistic attitude or fatalism is the helplessness of farmers against hegemony and the power of investors in collusion with the rulers. As stated by a farmer in Southern Denpasar Sub-District named I Wayan Panggih (49 years old) that a farmer who sold three hectares of rice fields in the area, used the proceeds to buy houses, cars, motorcycles, and other consumer goods. Ironically these goods were sold back in order to meet their daily needs, because they did not wise in using money earned. It occurs as a result of lack of education, knowledge, insight, skills and expertise, so that the money received on the sale of rice fields were finally used up without any outcome. The influence of globalization of technology that occurs in people who have a class of lower educational background often have negative impacts, compared to positive benefits for them. This is consistent with the idea of O'Donnell (2009: 22) who argued that materialism and consumerism damage the environment and deplete the spirit and values of society. In this case, it already happened a structured impoverishment with the construction of the capital in the ways of controlling the farming community with material in the form of money and the promise of pleasure of the progress of the modern world by selling their rice fields. In this context, the capitalists easily acquire www.ijmer.in
9
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
agricultural land so that it has been widespread process of conversion of paddy fields in Southern Denpasar Sub-District. The powerlessness of society in counteracting the effects of globalization due to the increasing people's lifestyles, cause people with lower socio-cultural capital eventually fall into poverty. Fatalism experienced by farmers in the Southern Denpasar SubDistrict is fatalism caused by lifestyle. Lifestyle in terms of being used as a means by which the capitalists marginalize farmers through technological hegemony (Barker, 2005). When farmers have been caught in a trap of capitalist hegemony, then indirectly the farmers will be hegemonized, by happily sold their land to be exchanged for a variety of technologies that can be used to show off the lifestyle, such as buying motor vehicles and other electronic goods. When people seduced by a variety of types of luxury goods, it is in this condition that the capitalists get in by offering high land prices, so that people who are not able to resist their desire to meet their hedonistic lifestyle through ownership of luxury goods, eventually will sell their rice fields that are supposed to be used with a better way. Fatalism in society also happened with promises of decent work if a farmer wants to sell their land. As described by I Nyoman Sukerta (72 years old) that the owners of capital coming into the community, in addition to offering a high price, they also promised that they will employ people as workers on their projects. Besides, if there are people who do not want to sell their land, they often visited by certain government officials to persuade the people to sell their land, often accompanied by intimidation. Rupert in Edkins and Williams (ed) (2010) explains Gramsci's concept of hegemony that the supremacy of a group manifests itself in two ways as domination and as an intellectual and moral leadership. On the one hand, a social group dominates the other social groups, opposition groups, dominate or subjugate, on the other hand social group lead groups of relatives and their allies. www.ijmer.in
10
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
Hegemony is done by manipulating the structure of habitus or cognition. The upper classes incorporate the interests and ideologies secretly along with the game of power so that the lower classes accept the upper class rule as a hegemonic power. Hegemonic powers not only because the upper class has the capital, but also because of the structure of cognition not absolutely determine the social action. The structure of cognition should be construed, interpreted according to space and time. Giddens stated as follows: “ .... the entire social life takes place in and shaped by, the interface between the presence and absence of the passage of time and the setting of space. Completeness of the physical body and Milieux moving into place, inevitably give a social character in social life, and limit the access ways on others who are not present throughout space. Geography notation time be an important way to the intersection of the pathways of space and time in everyday activities. But so, geography - space should be included in a more adequate theorizing both about the agent and the arrangement background interactions (Giddens 2010: 203)” At the time of the game of interests, ideology and power can be entered by the upper class to hegemonize the lower class. Lower class is difficult to take the fight, not only because they are poor of capital, but also because of the hegemonic power. They get caught up in false consciousness. False consciousness resulted in a stagnant condition for them. In a phenomenon that occurred in the Southern Denpasar SubDistrict, in addition to the desire to meet the lifestyle, the land also have been sold on the assumption that they would get a better job, such as to be employed on the tourism industry. Most of them think that tourism would support life in the future, so that it appears the idea that if they sell the land, it will become a center of tourism, they will be involved in, for example, become an employee at the tourist spot. www.ijmer.in
11
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
Tourism as an industry in practice is not easy for a person to be involved, especially for those who have limited capital. As noted by Prasiasa (2013: 11) who asserts that the tourism industry can create jobs at all levels of competence of personnel; from those who do not have the skills to highly skilled people, it is not entirely true in its reality in society. In fact, tourism as a major service industries require anyone who wants to work in the industry should have a certain capital. Plummer (2011: 229) describes seven resources in the stratification of life, namely economic, social, cultural, symbolic, political, physical, and personal resources. From the seventh resources proposed by Plummer (2011: 229), a person who wants to take part in the world of tourism labor should have all or some of the seven resources. If they want to become a tourism entrepreneur, then they should have all the resources. On the other hand, if they want to be an employee at one of the tourism business, at least they should have cultural and physical resources. Intense competition requires that each individual should have the highest and the best capital to get into the eco-tourism industry. Thus the attitude of pragmatism of farmers who choose the easiest and quickest way, finally only able to give a negative impact on them, in which they do not only lose the fields, but also cannot be involved in the formal sector of tourism, which is shaped by the cultural capitals: lower level of education, skills and expertise. Pragmatic attitude possessed by the people in the Southern Denpasar Sub-District led to the money generated through the sale of ricefield was not used to improve the quality of life, be it to pursue for further education until at a certain degree in order to be accepted in the formal sector and to use the money to start or to develop the business. Most of the impact is negative, namely, the proceeds from the sale of ricefield is used to satisfy the hedonistic and consumptive desire. In this case, hedonism as a way of life assumes that the pleasures and www.ijmer.in
12
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
the material are the main goals of life. For the adherents of this understanding, having fun, partiying, and pleasuring are the main goals of life, regardless of the possible consequences of such attitudes. Hedonism, as the opinion of Sarwono (1989) is the doctrine that pleasure is the most important thing in life, or hedonism is the idea espoused by those who only seek the pleasure of life. The Southern Denpasar Sub-District community paradigm adopts hedonistic lifestyle in line with the developments occurring in their environment, whether they are local or come from outside of their residence, including lifestyles that promoted on television. Increased materialism, consumerism, pragmaticism and moral aberrations of society in the Southern Denpasar Sub-District has led to various forms of negative behavior. Materialistic attitude led to the community has always relied on the material world; consumerism makes people to depend on the needs of the non-primary, pragmatic attitude makes people to be instant community-minded in the Southern Denpasar Sub-District. Such attitudes can be seen from the behavior of people of young age between 15 years and 35 years old that use their time from noon until late afternoon, on the streets without a clear purpose, going on the spree, chatting in a long time in the coffee shops. In these conditions, people are more inclined to behave consumptively rather than productively, more people are looking for instant ways than have to fight for their existence and a better future. Consumptive attitudes of the people has been implicated also to change in the perspective of the farm life that is no longer considered to be able to financially supportive to them. Consumptive way of life made by some people in the Southern Denpasar Sub-District evidenced by their attitudes that tend to prefer to put the tertiary needs over the primary needs. In accordance with the idea of Herbert Marcuse cited by Situmorang (2007: 47-48) that human trapped in a false needs. Excessive consumption of global www.ijmer.in
13
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
culture obtained through the markets, along with the development of false needs that ultimately made people to be willing to do a variety of things including to sell their agricultural land in exchange for their tertiary needs. The phenomenon is justified by I Komang Pasek, a young man living in Southern Denpasar Sub-District that if he had not had a mobile phone he would find it difficult, because it cannot get connected with friends. Moreover, they argued that the information would be easily obtained if you have a mobile phone. However, in practice it is not the function of a cell phone that matters to them, but the kind of having the latest fancy mobile phones which become their main objective which functioned as a marker of their lifestyles. Along with the improving lifestyle, the pragmatic attitude of the people especially the younger generation is unavoidable. For some people, asset from the land sales are the easiest way to do to meet their instant lifestyle. Mental of pragmatic in the society that emerged in the Southern Denpasar Sub-District is a mentality for seeking solutions to the problems faced by the instant ways without taking into account the aspects of sustainability, such as the land conversion has made farmers and their families in the end to fall in poverty, either material or socialcultural poverty. Referring to Chambers (1983: 140-168), the driving force factor can be attributed to the entrapment of poverty experienced by a family. Poverty is associated with poverty traps, in which involves a variety of conditions. Firstly, the physical weakness, such as a chronic family member illness. Secondly, the geographical isolation, i.e. the families who live in remote areas that are difficult to reach by public services provided by the state, such as education, health, etc. Thirdly, insecurity. They are in the fragile or vulnerable situations, such as food insecurity, health care insecurity, and others. As a result, a person often sell goods or trapped in debts to meet their needs. Fourthly, helplessness. These conditions result in a person being in a situation of
www.ijmer.in
14
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
powerlessness politically.
physically,
socially,
economically,
culturally,
and
These four factors above are related to one another so that people will be difficult to extricate themselves, forming what is called the poverty trap. In fact, no less important is that the poverty trap becomes stronger because of the various things that are difficult to avoid, namely the traditional custom obligations, accident, disability, unproductive expenditure, and extortion. These various conditions have made the people experience great structural pressures that they should be able to find the solution to maintain the existence of themselves and or their families. In this context, poverty has been the strong reasons for the people to take a variety of ways, including workers who volunteered to be paid a pittance as long as he or she earns a living. Closing Understanding the conversion of paddy fields into other functions can not be separated from the relationship concepts of ideology, hegemony, and culture. Conversion of paddy fields in the Southern Denpasar Sub-District showed the complexity of the antagonistic relationships of the power and the struggle between classes with the dominant culture and classes that are dominated (Giroux, 1981). Ideology serves as an awareness that gives perspective to the people as an objective principles that must be upheld for the survival of the people themselves (Althusser, 2010). On the other hand, it may result in the birth of ideology of false awareness that serves as a mean for the ruling class to maintain the status quo / hegemony (Ritzer, 2011). But the social reality also shows the presence of political action in the power relations that enable the people’s culture to experience transformation. Ideology according to Lefebvre, as cited by Ritzer (2011: 70), is a system of integrated ideas that are beyond human but it has coercive www.ijmer.in
15
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
powers. As Marx's concept of ideology, Ritzer (2011: 71) concluded that at least three interconnected ideas involved in the concept of ideology. Firstly is the ideology that depicts the interests and cultures of the ruling groups, including their impact on the material interests. Secondly, ideology is a reversed reflection, and contrary to the existing reality. Thirdly, ideology has an independent existence and forcing in nature. Of these three characteristics, it can be understood how ideology plays a role in obtaining the approval from the oppressed and exploited group and culture, as occurred in the farming community in the Sub-District of Southern Denpasar, Bali. References Althusser, Louis. 2010. Tentang Ideologi : Strukturalisme Marxis, Psikoanalitis, Cultural Studies. Yogyakarta : Jala Sutra Anom, I Putu. 2010. “Pembangunan Kepariwisataan Berkelanjutan”. Dalam Pariwisata Berkelanjutan Dalam pusaran Krisis Global. Denpasar: Udayanan University Press Barker, Chris. 2005. Cultural Studies Teori dan Praktek. Terjemahan Tim Kunci Cultural Studies Center. Yogyakarta:Bentang. ________. 2010. Ketika Nurani Ikut Berbisnis. (Agung, M. Cilik, Trans.) Jakarta:PT Elex Media Kompugindo. Chamber, Robert. 1983. Pembangunan Desa Mulai dari Belakang. Jakarta: LP3ES Dwidjowijoto, Nugroho. 2006. Kebijakan Publik Untuk Negara-Negara Berkembang. Model, Rumusan, Implementasi dan Evaluasi. Jakarta : PT.Elex Media Komputindo Rupert, Mark. “Antonio Gramsci”. Dalam Jenny Edkins-Nick Vaughan Williams
(Eds.).
2010.
Pandangan Utama Yogyakarta:Baca. www.ijmer.in
Teori-Teori Studi
Kritis
Politik
Menantang
Internasional..
16
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
Giddens, Anthony. 2010. Teori Strukturasi:Dasar-Dasar Pembentukan Struktur Sosial Masyarakat. Yogyakarta:Pustaka Pelajar Giroux, 1981) Keraf, A. Sonny. 2002. Etika Lingkungan. Jakarta:Kompas O’Donnell, Kevin. 2009. Posmodernisme. Terjemahan Jan Riberu. Yogyakarta: kanisius Richard Peet and Elaine Hartwick, 2009. Theories of Development. London : The Gulford Press Plummer, Ken. 2011. Sosiologi The Bacis. Jakarta:Raja Grafindo Persada. Prasiasa, Dewa Putu Oka. 2013. Destinasi Pariwisata Berbasis Masyarakat. Yogyakarta: Salemba Humanika. Priambodo, S, Arie. 2009. Panduan Praktis Menghadapi Bencana. Yogyakarta : Kanisius. Ratna, Nyoman Kutha. 2005. Sastra dan Cultural Studies Representasi Fiksi dan Fakta. Yogyakarta : Pustaka Pelajar Raditya, G. Ritzer. 2011. Ketika Kapitalis Berjingkrak. Yogyakarta : Pustaka Pelajar Sarwono. 1989. Psikologi Remaja. Jakarta : Rajawali. Scott, James C. 1981. Moral Ekonomi Petani Pergolakan dan Subsistensi di Asia Tenggara. Terjemahan Hasan Basari. Jakarta:LP3ES Situmorang, Abdul Wahib. 2007. Gerakan Sosial: Studi Kasus Beberapa Perlawanan. Pustaka Pelajar: Yogyakarta Widja, I Gede. 2014. Kapita Selekta Kajian Budaya Menemukan Landasan Bersama Pengembangan Program Kajian Budaya Universitas Udayana:Suatu Gagasan Awal. Denpasar:KA. www.ijmer.in
17
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(4), OCTOBER 2016
Wirawan, I.B. 2012. Teori-Teori Sosial dalam Tiga Paradigma Fakta Sosial, Definisi Sosial & Perilaku Sosial. Jakarta:Kencana Prenada Media Group.
www.ijmer.in
18
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
INDIAN TELECOMMUNICATIONS: A RURAL URBAN COMPARISON Manpreet Kaur Assistant Professor of Economics Lyallpur Khalsa College Jalandhar Abstract Communication, an important and significant part of economic infrastructure directly contributes to production and distribution process of economy. The Indian telecommunication network is the second largest network in the world after china. At present it is having about 1036.57 million (as on December 31, 2015) telephone connections which were 22.8 million in 1999. The present paper attempts to analyse the growth of Indian telecommunications from twin side - rural and urban by making comparisons of change in the subscriber base and teledensity. To achieve the objective, the secondary sources of data from year 2011-2015 are used. The study reveals that total subscriber base is increasing over the five years. The share of urban subscriber base is more than that of rural but the growth of rural telecommunication penetration is more than urban areas. There exists a huge gap between rural and urban teledensities which needs to be bridged by more reforms and measures. Keywords:- Telecommunications, Indian, Rural, Urban, Teledensity. Introduction Telecommunication sector in India has emerged as one of the fastest growing market in the world and still continues to register a significant growth .It is evident from the figures published by the department of telecommunications (DOT) which shows that from 22.8 million telephone subscribers in 1999, telecommunication sector has grown to 300.49 million in 2009 and to 1036.57 million in 2015 (upto December www.ijmer.in
19
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
31, 2015). A huge change of urban and rural subscribers base and teledensity has been recorded in few years. The present paper endeavours to analyse this change of urban and rural subscribers and rural and urban teledensities by comparing their growth rates. Objectives of the paper 1. To study the present status of Indian telecommunications. 2. To discuss the history of telecommunication services in India. 3. To
explore
the
rural
and
urban
growth
of
Indian
telecommunications. 4. To make comparisons of rural and urban teledensities in India. This paper has been divided into three sections. Section-I describes the current status of Indian telecommunications by highlighting the origin of telecommunication services in India and its journey of becoming one of the fastest growing sector in India. Section-II examines the growth of Indian telecommunication services in last five years (2011-2015) with special reference to rural and urban growth. Section-III explains the teledensity and make comparisons of rural and urban teledensities. Methodology: The present paper is based on secondary data collected from various sources like government reports and websites. Various newspapers and journals are also referred. This analysis is based on data for the years 2011-2015. Growth rates are compared to reach the conclusion. Review of Literature: M.Uppal (2004) has made a study on rural telephony. The study explained the fact that providing rural telephones and maintaining these is expensive so the service has almost always needed to be subsidized. The study found that large amount had been invested in India’s
telecommunication
www.ijmer.in
sector
could
have
augmented
the 20
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
government’s own small resources for connecting the unconnected. The failure of regulation and policy was that it had failed to create incentives to invest in areas where the unconnected mostly live. Isaksson
(2009)
in
his
working
paper
related
the
pace
of
Industrialization to the rate at which investment in telecommunication infrastructure occurs. According to him the telecommunications infrastructure has strong explanatory power for why some countries have industrialized and others not but this impact is seen to differ across stages of development. Jayanta Banerjee (2011) has explored different issues and challenges of mobile telecommunications in rural India and concluded that there are many noteworthy challenges to rural telecommunication. Rural network infrastructure is difficult to maintain as access to power, transport and road communication is poor. Rural telecom will not happen on its own but great deal of attention is to be given by the GOI to ensure that all obstacles are removed. Section-I The telecommunication services have been reached to every region of the country. It has emerged as one of the imperative components of economic growth required for overall socio-economic development of the country. The Indian telecommunication sector has registered an incredible growth during the past few years and at present it is the second largest telecom network in the world after china in terms of the number of telephone connections which are at 1036.57 million (as on December 31, 2015). Overall teledensity in the country is 81.85 percent. Urban teledensity is 152.57 percent and rural teledensty is 49.82 percent. All this has not happened in one or two years. it took several years and series of reforms and measures by the government of India to achieve the present status. The evolution of telecommunication services in India has a long history to go. www.ijmer.in
21
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
The telecommunication services were introduced in India in 1881. The telecommunication sector was considered as the most significant sector so was kept under state’s control. It was only in 1980’s when private sector was allowed to manufacture telecommunication equipment in 1985. Department of telecommunication (DOT) was established in 1985 and it was the only provider of domestic and long distance services. In 1980, DOT was converted into two wholly government owned companies: the Videsh Sanchar Nigam limited (VSNL) for international telecommunication and Mahanagar Telephone Nigam Limited (MTNL) for services in metropolitan areas. Major share of VSNL was later on purchased by TATA company. There were some other rural and urban areas which were still under regulation of DOT. The complete opening up of the Indian telecommunications sector for private players was done in 1990’s when National Telecom Policy (NTP) 1994 was introduced. In 1997 telecom regulatory authority of India (TRAI) was formed to act as a regulator to facilitate the growth of the telecommunication sector.With NTP 1999, cellular services were launched and in 2000, DOT became a corporation, Bharat Sanchar Nigam Limited (BSNL).From 2001 to 2011, the total number of telephone subscribers grew at a compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of 35 percent. The increase in teledensity has mainly been driven by the increase in mobile phones. Teledensity also showed wide regional variations across states. (Telecom sector in India: a Decadal profile, TRAI).From 2011 to 2015, the number of telephone subscribers have grown from 846.33 million to 996.13 million recording a growth of 17.7 percent over the five years. Section-II The Indian telecommunication sector has cloaked a phenomenal growth over the years. A phone which is an important source of connecting people was considered as a luxury years back but now due to
www.ijmer.in
22
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
sustainable measures taken by the government over the years. it has become a necessity in this knowledge intensive world. Table-I Total number of telephones( in millions) (From March 2011 to March 2015) Years
Number of Rural telephones
Urban
Annual%age Annual%age growth growth (rural) (urban)
2011
846.33
282.29
564.04
-
-
2012
951.35
330.83
620.52
17.2
10.01
2013
898.02
349.21
548.80
5.6
-11.6
2014
933.02
377.78
555.23
8.2
1.2
2015
996.13
416.08
580.05
10.14
4.5
Source: Annual reports, Department of Telecommunications Table-I clearly shows that annual percentage growth of rural subscribers is more than that of the growth of urban subscribers and it is persistently increasing. But there is a substantial fall in the growth of urban subscribers from the year 2012 to 2013 and even it has turned to negative 11.6 percent because people of urban areas are now more interested in wireless connection and fixed telephones are no more of any attraction for the these people rather they are disconnecting the existing ones. As this data pretains to both fixed and wireless so it shows negative growth also. The share of urban subscribers is in more total telephone connections. The reason can be traced as people in these areas are more educated and aware of increasing socio-economic significance of telecommunications. In rural areas also people are www.ijmer.in
23
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
making efforts to improve their quality of life by enhancing connectivity through telecommunications.The various policy initiatives has been taken by the government of India for many years to increase the growth of telecommunication services in the rural areas. Telecom regulatory authority of India (TRAI) has analysed the reason for having higher penetration of telecommunication services in rural areas in its consultation paper on “Growth of Telecom Services in Rural India: The way forward” (2004). According to TRAI, in a country like India where around 70 percent population lives in rural areas, it is necessary for telecom services to penetrate into rural areas. It will enhance the productivity and wealth generating capabilities of the local population which will increase the GDP (Gross Domestic Product) of the country. (TRAI report, 2005-06). All such efforts are evident from the Grah-I.
Graph-I
2011 Urban
2015
Rural
33.35 %
Rural
41.77 % 66.65 %
www.ijmer.in
Urban
58.23 %
24
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
The penetration of telecommunication services is increasing in rural areas. It is indicated by the graph-I which shows that in 2011, 33.35 percent of total telephones were in rural areas and 66.65 percent in urban areas. From 2011 to 2015 telecom penetration has increased more in the favour of rural areas than in urban areas as there are 41.77 percent of total subscribers are rural subscribers and 58.23 percent are urban subscribers in 2015. Section-III Teledensity denotes the number of telephones per 100 population. It is a significant indicator of telecom penetration in any country. Teledensity in India which was just 18.22 percent in 2007, jumped to 52.74 percent in 2010 and has reached to 79.36 percent in 2015. The rural teledensity which was only 5.89 percent in 2007 has touched 48.04 percent in 2015 and urban teledensity was 48.10 percent in 2007 which is now at incredible 149.04 percent in 2015 as per various annual reports of DOT. It can be considered as very sharp growth touching higher and higher levels. The graph below indicates the trend in teledensity over the years. Graph –II Trends in Teledensity 180.00% 160.00%
156.94%
169.17% 146.64%
140.00%
145.46%
149.04%
120.00% Rural
100.00% 80.00% 60.00% 40.00%
70.89% 33.83%
78.66%
73.32%
75.23%
79.36%
39.26%
41.05%
44.01%
48.04%
Urban Overall
20.00% 0.00% 2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
Source: Annual report 2015-16, DOT India www.ijmer.in
25
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Graph-II shows that overall teledensity has increased from 70.89 percent in 2011 to 79.36 percent in 2015. Urban teledensity has maintained its upward trend i.e. it is more than rural teledensity. But individually urban teledensity has registered a decline from 156.94 percent in 2011 to 149.04 percent in 2015 and rural teledensity has increased from 33.83 percent in 2011 to 48.04 percent in 2015. It is clear from the graph that overall teledensity has been increasing in the country with the introduction of wireless technologies but still there is a huge gap between urban teledensity and rural teledensity. The reason behind this digital gap can be of high costs. The cost of setting up of networks in rural areas is very high and revenue earned is low in comparison to urban areas. Private operators are reluctant to install rural networks (Gairola, Hindustan Times, 2012).There is a strong need to bridge this gap as majority of population in India is living in rural areas. Conclusion: Telecommunication sector in India has attained the position of imperative infrastructure for economic development. This sector has witnessed a remarkable growth over the years as shown by telecom development indicators like number of telephones and teledensity. Number of subscribers has grown by 17.7 percent over the last five years (2011-2015). The share of urban sector has decreased from 66.65 percent in 2011 to 58.23 percent in 2015. The share of rural sector has increased from 33.35 percent in 2011 to 41.77 percent in 2015. Teledensity is also showing increasing trends. But the issue of wide gap between rural and urban teledensity needs to be addressed with much more efforts and measures. Rural connections and rural teledensity has improved a lot in few years but still a digital divide exists. The need of the hour is to introduce such measures which give incentive to private incumbents to expand their network in rural areas along with public sector giants. The telecommunication services are doing very well. www.ijmer.in
26
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Urban sector has gained much more from this sharp growth than rural areas but the trend for the last five years shows that now rural sector is gaining more by enhancing its pace of growing in terms of number of subscribers and teledensity. The overall growth of the Indian telecommunications is on the right track. References: 1. Uppal, Mahesh (2004) “Rural Telephony: the missing link”, Business standard. 2. Roy, S (2009) “Growth of the Telecom sector in India” The viewspaper, the voice of the youth. 3. Isaksson, Anders (2009), Telecommunications and Industrial development. Working paper 14/2009, 2009 UNIDO 4. Banaerjee, Jayanta (2011): “Mobile Telecommunication: Role and Prospects in the Development of Rural India” VIEWPOINT Volume 2 No.1 5. Gairola, Manoj (2012) “India’s Rural Urban digital gap”, Hindustan Times. 6. Telecom sector in India: A Decadal profile TRAI 7. Various TRAI- Annual Reports 8. Various DOT- Annual Reports 9. Position paper on the telecom sector in India (2009) department of economic affairs, Ministry of Finance.
www.ijmer.in
27
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
THE ANALYSIS ON THE UNIQUENESS OF SPIRITUAL HEALING AS PRODUCT DIFFERENTIATION IN THE BALI TOURISM I Gede Sutarya Doctoral Student in Tourism Postgraduate Program Udayana University & Lecturer , Department of Tourism State Hindu Dharma Institute Denpasar
Prof. Dr. I Nyoman Sirtha The Promotor and a Professor Doctoral Program of Postgraduate Program Udayana University Bali, Indonesia
Abstract Spiritual healing is a health development of body, mind, and spirit by using spiritual powers, namely the mantras or spells, rituals, breathing energy, and other religious symbols that have been growing rapidly after the 2000s in Bali. Research was designed to discover the uniqueness of spiritual healing in Bali which has differentiation on tourism products. The research was qualitative research which data and information were collected based on observation, interviews and literature review. The observation was done in Ubud Tourism Destination, Gianyar and Region of Muncan, Karangasem. The interviews were done with five tourists who have experiences in Ashram Munivara and Ashram Ratu Bagus. The interviews were also done with three healers and the owner of Yoga Barn and Cepik Villa who have experiences to handle the tourists. The data were analyzed based on descriptive qualitative method by implemented the Theory of Products Planning. The results showed that spiritual healing in Bali comprises of output of processing by the tourists and the local people. In the processing, the local gurus and rituals are really important that have never omitted. The results indicated that the local gurus and the rituals are augmented quality of products of spiritual healing in Bali that distinguish it from similar products. Differentiaton in the form of
www.ijmer.in
28
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
local gurus and rituals have made spiritual healing as competitive productsin Bali tourism. Keywords: spiritual healing, uniqueness, product differentiations, Bali tourism Introduction Spiritual healing is an attempt to build the health of body, mind, and spirit by using such spiritual mantras, rituals, breathing energy, and religious symbols that has become popular in Bali tourism business after the 2000s. Eat Pray Love Novel has contributed to promote Bali as a spiritual tourism destination since its publication in 2006. The novel publication of Eat Pray Love was a complement to tourism promotion of Bali after the Bali bombing on October 12, 2002 and October 1, 2005, in which the novel has put local healers like I Ketut Liyer and Ni Wayan Nuriasih as the search for foreign tourists to Ubud, Bali. Searches of foreign tourists for spiritual healing in Bali have slowed down the process of stagnation of Bali tourism after the Bali bombing in 2002 and the second Bali bombing in 2005, making the visits of foreign tourists continued to increase again after the Bali Bomb II, i.e. from 1.6 million in 2007 to 4,001 million in 2015 (BPS Bali Statistics Office, 2016). The increase in the number of foreign tourists is in line with the business growth of spiritual healing in the post-2006 of Bali tourism. Since 2006, the spiritual healing has been growing with the emergence of Yoga and Healing centers in the classy hotels and villas. The rapid growth is evidenced with the developments of the Yoga Barn, Radiantly Alive, Yoga centers, and spiritual healing services in hotels, villas and home stays in Ubud started in 2006, right after the Bali bombing. Until 2015, the Government of Gianyar Regency recorded around 10 businesses of spiritual healing operating in Ubud Tourism www.ijmer.in
29
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Region (Tourism Office Gianyar, 2015).The data of Gianyar Regency governmentdoes not include the villas and hotels that provide spiritual healing services, such as Villa Sankara, BagusJati, Four Seasons, and others. This data also does not include activities in the people's homes that also offer spiritual healing, such as the Liyer House and Ni WayanNuriasih’s. The incomplete data collection has just been conducted by the Government of Gianyar Regency, while other regencies in Bali have not yet recorded the growth of spiritual healing businesses. The Karangasem Regency government is one of examples of regency that has not recorded these businesses, but the distribution of spiritual healing services has spread in Karangasem such as in the Villages of Muncan, Sidemen, Manggis and Candidasa. Only a few of the local people have taken the spiritual healing business opportunities. Those who take advantage of these opportunities just Ratu Bagus, Arsana, Suambara, Liyer, Gunarta and Nuriasih. Most of these opportunities are taken by healers from overseas. Spiritual healing at the Yoga Barn, for example, that out of the 25 healers who work at the Yoga Barn, 22 healers are from abroad (Yoga Barn, 2016). Radiantly Alive is another example, of the five permanent healers introduced, only one healer is the local person (Radiantly Alive, 2016).Some healers from abroad also open these businesses independently around Ubud area, on Jalan Subak Sokwayah region, Ubud. In the small lane, it is standing Ubud Yoga House owned by Sheila Burch of California, USA, as well as some more cottages that offer Ayurveda and various other spiritual healing sessions (Yogahouse, 2016). The foreign healers are mostly located in the tourism region of Ubud, Gianyar. In the Muncan region of Karangasem is still dominated by the local healers, as happened in the Ratu Bagus Ashram where the
www.ijmer.in
30
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
spiritual guru is the Balinese. Cepik Villa in Sidemen also still uses the local healers, although its products are a combination of Bali-India because Cepik Villa is networked with the Ananda Marga Ashram (Interview with the owner of Cepik Villa, Ayu Suciani, conducted on May 15, 2016). The facts that happened in the Tourism Area of Ubud and in the region of Muncan show that both healers and the materials of spiritual healing sessions in Bali are dominated by foreigners, whereas in theory, the searches for spiritual healing sessionsare actually the searches for traditional religion and ethnicity, that is called secular pilgrimage (Hollinshead, 1999), as the definition or the term of spiritual healing itself refers to the uses of natural energy indirectly through transformation of the healers to cure people independently (Aldridge, 1993; Sutcliffe, 2003; Winkelman, 2005).The use of indirect natural energy is a spiritual form, which is beyond the five senses, that it distinguishes the spiritual healing from other healing methods. The differences of spiritual healing from other healings are that the spiritual healing uses spiritual means, such as meditation, breathing techniques (pranayama), mantras/ spells, rituals, and certain symbols in the healing process independently, with the guidance and assistance from the healers. The use of spiritual means such as meditation, breathing, mantras, rituals and particular symbols is closely related to the religious tradition. Examples of this search are on the participation of tourists in the Ritual of Ayuascha in the Amazone, America and African Sangoma Ritual (Winkelman, 2005 Binsbergen, 1999). The quest for spiritual healing by following religious activities also occurred in Pu-Tuo-San, China. Foreign tourists in the mountains of Pu-Tuo-San conduct religious activities, such as attending the Hermitage as practiced by the Buddhist monks to improve health (Wong et al, 2013). In Bali, Indonesia, foreign tourists also follow religious rituals of PitraYadnya www.ijmer.in
31
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
(sacrifices or services to ancestors) for physical and emotional health (Narottama, 2012: 188-189). The quests in Africa, America, China and Bali (Indonesia) are more as quests forauthentic experience or as authenticity. India is a country which develops spiritual healing of Ayurveda for reasons of religious authenticity of local traditions, because India is the origin of Ayurveda which rooted in the religious traditions of India namely Hinduism. Therefore, India has a good reputation for Ayurveda as it has historical and religious background of the original. State of Kerala, India is specially developed as a center for Ayurvedic healings, because of its history and good reputation (Bookman, 2007:132; Kulkarni, 2008:35; Jyotish T., 2009:78; Begum, 2012:1). The quest for this authenticity also occurred in the City of Mysore, India which is historically the Yoga center (Maddox, 2015). Therefore, in the Indian context, such originality is a form of authenticity. Authenticity is the perception of tourists, and what is provided by the hosts. Cohen (in Hall, 2003: 287) states that the meeting point between the tourists and the hosts is authenticity. Therefore, Apostolakis (2003: 801) states authenticity is divided into tourist experiences and the objects of the journey. From the objects of the journey, the search for such authenticity is a form of romanticism of the European people for Asia, America and Africa, because the European people have experienced an emptiness of values amidst the rapid industrial development in the countries. Emptiness of values have attracted the European people to the charms of the religions, the arts, and the natures of the Eastern world (Ritzer and Smart, 2014). The charms of the religions, the arts, and the natures are making Asia, Africa and America to become tourist attractions for spiritual healings. Therefore, the charm of religion, art, and nature of Bali is the authenticity of spiritual healing in Bali. Authenticity as uniqueness is
www.ijmer.in
32
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
the product differentiation of spiritual healing in Bali. Differentiations of these products need to be researched to develop spiritual healing in Bali as the tourism product competitiveness. The uniqueness of Bali spiritual healing is new in terms of the research issues and the research sites, because the previous studies conducted in Bali (Susanti, 2009; Ariawan, 2012; Narottama, 2012) only researched on the attractiveness and the experiences of foreign tourists. Other research in the world are also on the subjects of the attractiveness issues (Maddox, 2015) and commodification (Holman, 2011). The uniqueness of spiritual healing in Bali and its analysis of the tourism product with competitiveness is a new research, which arises from disparities in the concept of the quests for authenticity and the practice in the Bali tourism. Thus, the problems of this research are how the uniqueness of the spiritual healing in Bali, and how to develop its uniqueness in order to be competitive in the global competition. The purpose of this study was to identify the uniqueness of spiritual healing in Bali, and to analyze the this uniqueness as the differentiation of products as proposed by the Theory of Products Planning to face the global competition. The research was conducted in Ubud Tourism Region and the Region of Muncan, because Ubud is a place of healing spiritual development the most (Tourism Office of Gianyar, 2015) and the Muncan Region is an emerging area with the Ratu Bagus Ashram. This research was a qualitative research which used five respondents from tourists, three healers, and two owner of spiritual healing bussiness. The research started from December of 2014 untill January of 2016. This study used data collection methods by using literature study, observation, and interviews.The observations were done in Ashram Munivara, Ubud, Gianyar and Ashram Ratu Bagus, Muncan, Karangasem. The interviews were done with five tourists who have
www.ijmer.in
33
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
experiences in Ashram Munivara, Ubud, Gianyar and Ashram Ratu Bagus, Muncan, Karangasem. The interviews were also done with three healers and the owner of Yoga Barn and Cepik Villa who have experiences to handle the tourists. The data was analyzed qualitatively. The data were analyzed based on descriptive qualitative method by implemented the Theory of Products Planning. Results and Discussions Based on research in the Tourism Area of Ubud, Gianyar and Muncan Region, Karangasem, the forms of originality of spiritual healing have been modified. In both regions there are eight types of spiritual healing, namely Asana (bodywork), Pranayama (breathing), Dhyana (meditation), Tantra (the use of ritual), Usada (herbal medicine in addition to spells/mantras and rituals), Magic (astrology), BayuSuci (Shaking), and Malukat (holy bath ritual). Among the eight types of spiritual healing, the bodywork, breathing and meditation have been very common in the world, because they have spread very rapidly from India to Europe and America since the 1960s through the dissemination of yoga that brought by the neo-Hindu (Ramstedt, 2008: 1236). Spiritual healing with rituals, herbal combination with mantraritual, Shaking, and holy bath are the local contents of Bali because the Balinese rituals use them but they have been modified with a mixture of modern science and yoga. The eight kinds of spiritual healing are also conducted at various places of activities ranging from hotels, villas, activity centers, and ashrams. Most places of spiritual healing activities are also the places that are not original, even fancy places. Of the various places of these activities, two ashrams namely Munivara Ashram in Ubud and Ratu Bagus Ashram in Muncan are two places that have an image of originality, because they were developed by thespiritual community of Bali. www.ijmer.in
34
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Ketut Arsana is the founder of Munivara Ashram in 2006 and Ida Pandita Mpu Parama Daksa Natha Ratu Bagus is the founder of the Ratu Bagus Ashram in 1992. In the two ashrams, foreign tourists follow the spiritual practice at least a week, so that the experience becomes more pronounced. Foreign tourists who follow the spiritual practice in hotels, villas and activity centers, are foreign tourists who just want to get to know the products of spiritual healing in Bali. Foreign tourists who followed these spiritual healings in the two ashrams expressed their experiences that the local gurus have their own charms. The charm is the energy. The local guru’s energy helps foreign tourists to be more quickly connect to the energy outside themselves. The attractiveness of the local gurus is considered to be able to help them more quickly to deal with the energy outside themselves when compared to other spiritual gurus in their own countries. This statement was conveyed by Shanta (55-60 years old), a tourist from the Netherlands who came to Bali specifically to meet with Ratu Bagus. He said that he had participated in various spiritual healing, but he felt Ratu Bagus has a different energy, so he can help him to be more quickly connected with the energy. The quick connection with the energy wasthe unique experience to be in the Ashram of Ratu Bagus. "When I Came here I could feel an energy in here and I Knew yess that it is and I know it isnot logic" (interview with Shanta, June 20, 2015). Anahita, a tourist from Spain explained that Ratu Bagus has a power that help a person to deal with energy more quickly. "Here (ashram) is the real place where they have to grow. Ratu is very important here, Ratu is a channel of God, ... when you want to learn how to connect in love and God, he (Ratu) is the channel" (interview with Anahita, August 3, 2014). Aysem Celikiz from Turkey also said the
www.ijmer.in
35
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
same thing, that Ratu Bagus has an active energy which helps to connect to the energy outside themselves (interviews, August 3, 2014). The energy of Ratu Bagus is also felt by Jemma Vestal (30-35 years old), a tourist from Switzerland. She initially came for a short visit (1 Week) in February 2015. In this short visit, she was able to feel the energy on the first day until the following day. Therefore, she repeated her visit back on 6 - 29 May 2015. On May 23, 2015, she was seen to have Shaking exercise very seriously, so she stated that RatuBagus is very unusual (observation and interview, May 23, 2015). Britanny (25-30 years old), a tourist from Canada also stated that Ketut Arsana (Master of Kundalini Yoga Tantra in Ubud) has an energy that could help to establish the stability of the mind. "When I met Arsana on the internet, I was interested to him. When I met him in the ashram, I felt the energy from Ketut Arsana, "(Brittanny, July 29, 2015 interview). Because of that, she lived up to 5 weeks to train with Arsana. Barber (53 years old), a tourist from Australia also said that Arsana a master who has a charisma that she endured 2 months to have training practice with Arsana (interview, July 29, 2015). The energies of the gurus or masters are keywords that are possessed by the local gurus in Bali, as accountedby the tourists. Yoga master (guru), I Ketut Bandiastra says, the energies of the masters (gurus) are only the expression of foreign tourists to express their joys or excitements upon meeting with the native spiritual healing masters. This exciting feeling that brings the energy, which helps tourists to feel the peace of mind. Bandiastra explained that until today, the most famous yoga centers in the world are in Canada and Australia. Yoga centers in these countries have yoga masters that are internationally certified, with good knowledge. But the tourists still come to Bali and India to seek genuine native masters or gurus. "If they meet with yoga masters in www.ijmer.in
36
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Bali, they are likely to meet with the genuine masters" (Bandiastra, interview, February 3, 2016). The statement of Shanta, a tourist from the Netherlands supports the opinion of Bandiastra by saying "I come here because by being here alone to live more in my heart and then in my heart, I am happy, and when I live in my mind, I get worry" (Shanta, interview June 20, 2015). This statement indicates that Ratu Bagus and his ashram is a place to find happiness, to warm upher heart. The warming up of the heart is the key to finding happiness. Anahita (55 years old), a tourist from Spain accounted "Ratu is the channel of God", or Ratu Bagus (Master of Yoga Shaking) is the channel for her to God. She said that her master as the channel of God because after having Shaking practice for two days, she could be connected to the energy outside herself. She said, with Shaking, she could feel the energy moving constantly with cosmic consciousness so that her mind becomes more stable. Anahita experience shows that meeting with Ratu Bagus, had already made her mind to be happy. Happiness is helping to accelerate the process of being in the consciousness of cosmic energy, so she could move in cosmic consciousness. This cosmic consciousness movement has helped her to feel the stability of mind. With a stable mind, she could find happiness. The experiences of the foreign tourists show that the quest for authenticity through the genuine masters and the experiences to follow the religious practices in the ashramsis a spiritual authenticity form of healing in Bali. The search for native masters (gurus) and the experiences to follow the religious rituals of ethnic Balinese spiritual healing are also realized by other service providers, such as Yoga Barn and Radiantly Alive.
www.ijmer.in
37
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
The owner of Yoga Barn, I Made Gunarta (52 years old) said that he wanted to develop local healers at his yoga center gradually. Until 2016, he already has Made Murni who has studied and mastered Yoga and other healing expertise with international certification (Gunarta, August 30, 2015 interview). Radiantly Alive also invited a local healer to join his center (Radiantly Alive, 2016). The search for native masters or learning from the great civilizations of the past (before the birth of modern religions), was the phenomenon of the Grand Tour of the 17th to 19th century (Cooper, 2012). At that time, the European elites undertook the tours to visit places of civilization heritage of the world such as in France and Italy. The search of Grand Tour was then spread to many places in the world, such as Latin America, Africa, and Asia, because these locations also have great world civilization heritages. The search to all parts of the world (America, Africa, and Asia) continued to the New Age movement, which began in the 1960s with emphasis on individual searches to ethnic religions, to be apart from the established religions in the world (Ivakhiv, 2006: 264). The journey to find this spiritual healing has resulted in the process called reduction of knowledge into science (Ritzer and Smart, 2014). Reduction of knowledge occurred by finding scientific explanations of the knowledge of the local knowledge. In the case of Ratu Bagus Ashram, tourists from Italy conducted the knowledge reduction on Bayu Suci became the so-called Shaking that is logically acceptable by the European people. Another example is the knowledge reduction of Ketut Arsana’s at the Ashram Munivara into Kundalini Yoga Tantra. Kundalini Yoga is a general science that has been known to the Western world (Europe), but the ritual performed by Arsana is poorly understood. Arsana then restat edit into Tantra, which is already a familiar teaching as a www.ijmer.in
38
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
combination with yoga. By this combination, the ritual knowledge of Arsanawas reduced to yoga that has been very popular in the world. Reduction of knowledge into science can be conducted in two ways. First, through the intervention of foreigners and second,it can be done by the healers by learning the modern science. Reduction through the intervention of foreigners can be seen in the case of Ratu Bagus Ashram that conducted reduction through the touch of Italian tourists. The example of reduction done by the healer through his acquaintance with modern science was conducted by Arsana. This healer who has Omham Retreat has phrased his own knowledge in rituals into Tantra, which is common practice in the world community i.e. healing through dance, singing, and certain symbols. Arsana can express his local knowledge into a larger discourse because this healer is an educated man, he was the former religion teacher at the formal school. The intervention of foreigners and reduction itself in building products are still maintaining the spiritual healing rituals and the local masters, while the herbal treatment has been modified. Therefore, the local masters and rituals are forms of uniqueness that should be maintained as a differentiation with products of other spiritual healing in the world, so that tourists can distinguish which spiritual healing that has the characteristics of Bali, and which one is not. The local masters and rituals help tourists discover the authenticity and special experience. Authenticity appears from the local masters, while the special experience comes from doing the ritual with the guidance of the local masters. Therefore, meeting the genuine native masterss and performing ethnic religious practices in Bali is theformer of authenticityon the tourists who perform spiritual healing in Bali.
www.ijmer.in
39
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
The different experiences in meeting the local masters and in performing religious rituals is called differentiation as proposed by the Theory of Products Planning. Based on the Products Planning Theory, there are four things that must be considered in planning the development of the product, namely identifying specific needs, target markets, positioning itself, and a competitive product (Seaton and Bennett, 1996: 115). In efforts to position themselves associated with building a product that is competitive, spiritual healing in Bali has local masters and special rituals as a differentiation with other products in the world, so that the local masters and the rituals can be referred to as augmented products of spiritual healing in Bali. Conclusion The uniqueness of spiritual healing in Bali is the local masters (healers) and the religious rituals. The unique local masters and rituals is described in the reduction process of knowledge into science that does not eliminate the local masters (healers) and the rituals, although the reduction was done by foreigners (tourists). The maintenance of local masters and the local rituals in the knowledge reduction process occurs because the local masters (healers) and the local rituals the energy generator in the spiritual healing in Bali which give the effect of joy and serenity. The local masters (healers) and these rituals are the authenticity offered by local communities in accordance with the expectations of tourists to find authenticity in Bali. The authenticity of the local masters (healers) and these rituals are the special spiritual experiences of foreign tourists that serve as a differentiator (differentiation) of spiritual healing in Bali, with spiritual healing in other places in the world. Therefore, the local masters and the rituals are augmented products of spiritual healing in Bali, which must be maintained in the plan to build competitive tourism products of spiritual healing in Bali.
www.ijmer.in
40
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
This research limitation is just cover the uniquesness of spiritual healing as product differentiations. This research isnot measure what is significant uniquesness of spiritual healing which become push factors and pull factors for tourist. Measuring of push factors and pull factors of tourists who were clients of spiritual healers is a suggestion for futher research. References 1. Aldridge.
1993.
Does
Research
Evidence
Exist
for
SpritualHealing.The Journal of Mind-Body Health. 9 (4):1-21. 2. Apostolakis, Alexandros. 2003. The Convergence Process in Heritage Tourism. Annal of Tourism Research. 30 (4): 795-812. 3. Begum, Shaik Shahazadi. 2013. Medical and Wellness Tourism: Opportunities and Challenges-Marketing ‘Brand India’. Research Journal of Management Sciences. 2 (1): 1-6. 4. Binsbergen, Wim Van. 1999. We are in this for the money (paper). Amsterdam: Identities.
International
Conference
Commodification
and
5. Biro Pusat Statistik. 2016. Statistik Indonesia.BPS (Online).(Cited on March, 29, 2016, 10 pm) available from www.bps.go.id. 6. Bookman, Milica Z and Karla R Bookman. 2007. Medical Tourism in Developing Countries, England: Palgrave Macmillan. 7. Cooper, Chris. 2012. Essentials Of Tourism. England: Pearson. 8. Four Season. 2016. Four Seasons Bali Sayan. http://www.fourseasons.com/sayan/spa/ cited on January, 16, 2016, 3 pm. 9. Hall, Colin Michael. 2003. Introduction to Tourism: Dimensions and Issues. Australia: Hospitality Press.
www.ijmer.in
41
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
10. Hollinshead, Keith. 1999.‘Tourism as Public Culture: Horne’s Ideological Commentary on the Legerdemain of Tourism’.International Journal of Tourism Research.Juli/August: 267-292. 11. Holman, Christine. 2011. Surfing For A Shaman: Analyzing an Ayahuasca Website. Annals of Tourism Research. 38 (1): 90-109. 12. Ivakhiv, Adrian. 2006. Power Trips: Making Sacred Space Through New Age Pilgrimage. KEMP. F14: 263-286. 13. Jyotish and V.K Janardhanan. 2009. Service Quality in Health Tourism: An Evaluation of the Health Tourism Providers of Kerala (India). South Asia Journal of Tourism and Heritage. 2 (1): 77-82. 14. Kulkarni, Sonali. 2008. Medical Tourism in India.Jaypur: Book Enclave Jain Bhavan. 15. Maddox, Callie Batts. 2015. Studying at the Source: Asthangga Yoga Tourism and the Search for Authenticity in Mysore, India. Journal of Tourism and Culture Change. 13 (4): 330-343. http://www.tandfondline.com. 16. Narottama, Nararya. 2012. Wisata Spiritual: Studi Kasus Partisipasi Orang Asing dalam UpacaraPitraYadnya di Desa Pakraman Muncan, Kecamatan Selat, KabupatenKarangasem (Thesis). Denpasar: Universitas Udayana. 17. Radiantly Alive. 2016. Teachers Therapis.http://radiantlyalive.com/teachers-and-therapists/. on June,29, 2016, 10 pm.
and Cited
18. Ramstedt, Martin. 2008. Hindu Bonds at Work: Spiritual and Commercial Ties between India and Bali. The Journal of Asian studies. 67 (4): 1227-1250.
www.ijmer.in
42
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
19. Ritzer, George dan Barry Smart. 2014. Handbook Teori Sosial. (Translation). Bandung: Nusamedia. 20. Seaton, A.V dan M.M. Bennett. 1996. Marketing Tourism Products; Concepts, Issues, Cases. London: Thomson Business Press. 21. Sutcliffe, Steven J. 2003. Children of the New Age, A History of Spiritual Practices. London and New York: Routledge. 22. Winkelman, Michael. 2005. Drug Tourism or Spiritual Healing? Ayahuasca Seekers in Amazona.Journal of Psycoactive Drugs, 37 (2): 209-2018. 23. Wong, Cora Un In dkk. 2013. Buddhism and Tourism Perceptions of the Monastic Community at Pu-Tuo-Shan, Cina. Annal Tourism Research, 40: 213-234. 24. Yoga Barn. 2016. Ubud Yoga Classes at the Yoga Barn.http://www.theyogabarn.com/schedule.html. cited on June, 29 2016, 9 pm. 25. Yoga House. 2016. Ubud Yoga House Yoga for Every Body.http://ubudyogahouse.com/about-us.html. cited on August, 3, 2016, 11 pm.
www.ijmer.in
43
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
A CRITICAL REVIEW ON SEDITION K.Chandrasekhara Rao Research Scholar P.G Department of Legal Studies and Research Acharya Nagarjuna University Nagarjuna Nagar, Guntur, A.P Introduction: There is a lot of “hue and cry” over whether section 124-A of the Indian penal Code (IPC), 1860 should remain in the Statute book or not after the arrest by the Delhi Police at the behest of the Government to Kanhai Kumar, president of the Jawaharlal Nehru University (JNU) students union, basing on the complaints of sedition, represents the latest deplorable attack on free speech by the Indian State. The word ‘Sedition’ does not occur in Section 124-A of the IPC or in the Defence of Indian Rule. It is only found as a marginal note to Sec 124-A and is not an operative part of the section. Meaning and definition of ‘Sedition’: Kenny:- “Uttering of the seditious words, the publication of seditious libels, and conspiracies to do an act for the furtherance of a seditions intention”. Sir James Stephen:“An intention to bring in to hatred or contempt, or to excite disaffection against, the person of his majesty his heirs or successors, or the Govt and the Constitution of the United Kingdom by law established, or either house of parliament, or the administration of justice or to excite his majesty’s subjects to attempt other-wise than by lawful means, the alteration of any matters in Church or State by law established.... or to raise discontent or disaffection amongst his
www.ijmer.in
44
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
majesty’s subjects, or to promote feelings of ill will and hostility between different classes of such subjects. U/S 124 of the IPC, 1860:“Who ever, by words, either spoken or written, or by signs, or by visible representation, or other-wise, brings or attempts to bring in to hatred or contempt, or excites or attempts to excite disaffection towards, the Govt established by law in India, shall be punished with imprisonment for life, to which fine may be added or with imprisonment which may extend to three years, or which fine may be added, or with fine”. Explanation 1: The expression ‘disaffection’ includes disloyalty and all feelings of enmity. Explanation 2: Comments expressing disapprobation of the measures of the Govt with a view to obtain their alteration by lawful means, without exciting or attempting to excite hatred, contempt or disaffection, do not constitute an offence under this section. Explanation 3: Comments expressing disapprobation of the administrators or other action of the Govt without exciting or attempting to excite hatred, contempt or disaffection, do not constitute an offence under this section. Some important case laws in respect of ‘Sedition’: 1. Rem Nandan V.State of U.P (AIR 1959 Alld.101): In this case, the High Court (HC) held that section 124 A imposed restriction on the freedom of speech which is not in the interest of the general public and hence declared 124-A as Ultra vires. www.ijmer.in
45
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
2. Kedaranath Das V. State of Bihar (AIR 1962 SC 955): Albeit, the Supreme Court (SC) was overruled the decision of the HC verdicted in the above cited case law. 3. Tara Singh V. State of Punjab (AIR 1950 SC 124): In this case, the SC was struck down the Section 124 A of the IPC as unconstitutional being contrary to the freedom of speech and expression as guaranteed U/A 19(1)(a) of the Constitution of India (COI). 4. Brij Bhushan V.State of Delhi (AIR 1950 SC 129): In this case, the court was struck down Sec 7 of the East Punjab Safety Act, 1949 on the ground that since it was restriction on the liberty of the press. 5. Indian Express V.Union of India & others (1973)2 SCR. 757: It was held that the press plays a very significant role in the democratic machinery. The courts have duty to uphold the freedom of press and invalidate all laws and administrative actions that abridge that freedom. 6. Shreya Singhal V.Union of India (2015 SC): In a landmark judgment, the SC quashed the controversial section 66A of the I.T. Act (Amended in 2008) and Section 118(d) of the Kerala Police Act and restored the freedom of speech as guaranteed by the COI U/A 19(1)(a) and commented that Sec. 66A was “disproportionately invades the right of free speech”. Certain bitter incidents occurred in various parts of India of late: They are as cited beneath in a nutshell. 1) Cartoonist “Aseem Trivedi” was charged with sedition for his ‘offensive ‘cartoons. The Kanpur-based artist has been accused of putting up banners mocking the Constitution during a rally of anticurruption crusader, Anna Hazare in Mumbai, he also posted the www.ijmer.in
46
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
same on the Social media. He was arrested in Mumbai under IPC Section 124 (Sedition), section 66A of Information Technology Act and Section 2 of Prevention of Insults to Nation Honour Act. 2) “Binayak Sen” is an Indian paediatrician, public health specialist and activist. He was also the national vice-president of the People’s Union for Civil Liberties. Sen was accused of sedition by the Chhattisgarh government for allegedly supporting the outlawed Naxalites, thereby violating the provisions of the Chhattisgarh Special Public Security Act, 2005 (CSPSA) and the Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act 1967. 3) A noted writer, author and political activist was sought to be charged with sedition for advocating independence for the disputed Kashmir region. Roy along with Hurriyat leader Syed Ali Shah Geelani and others was booked on charges of sedition by the Delhi Police for their “anti-India” speech at a seminar in 2010. 4) Fire brand leader “Praveen Togadia”, an Indian doctor and advocate for Hindu nationalism was slapped with the charge of sedition by the Rajasthan government in 2003. He was jailed on charges of defying the prohibitory orders and ban on distribution of tridents, he faced charges under Section 124-A of IPC (waging war or attempting anti-national activity). 5) Simranjit Singh Mann, President of the Shiromani Akalidal, Amritsar was charged with four different cases of sedition registered against him. He was booked for raising pro-khalistan slogans on June 6, 2005 in the golden temple complex on the 21st anniversary of Operation Blue Star. He also helped Bhindranwale and his men by distributing arms while he was posted in Faridkot as a senior superintendent of police in 1980. Apart from this, Mann was named in the assassination of former Prime Minister, Indira Gandhi, but investigation could not prove it. www.ijmer.in
47
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
6) Majlis-e-Ittehadul Muslimeen MLA, Akbaruddin Owaisi was slapped with the charge of sedition by the district police of Karimnagar, for the purported hate speech, he delivered at Nirmal on 22 December 2013. He was booked under Sections 124 A, 120B, 295A, 188 and 505 of IPC. Suggestions and Conclusion: Thus beyond any doubt that the British relic Section 124 A of the IPC, 1860 over rides and adversely effects the freedom of speech as guaranteed by the COI U/A 19(1)(a). In this connection it is an apt to quote here the buzz words of pandit Jawaharlal Nehru expressed before the Indian parliament that “now so far as I am concerned section 124 A is highly objectionable and obnoxious and it should have no place both for practical and historical reasons, if you like, in any body of laws that we might pass”. Therefore the sooner we get rid of it, the better. But it is a sorry State of affair that though more than 65 years have been elapsed so far, sedition continues to not only remain in the IPC, but also occupied a pride of place in the States arsenal. Albeit, better late than never, the hon’ble SC in shreya Singhal V. Union of India case, verdicted its landmark judgment that Sec 66A of the I.T Act 2000 is “unconstitutional and disproportionately invades the rights of freedom of speech” as guaranteed by the COI U/A 19(1)(a) and the court further ruled that “speech how so ever offensive, annoying or inconvenient cannot be prosecuted unless its utterance has, at the least, a proximate connection with any incitement to disrupt public order. Here we have to note that to argue against sedition does not tantamount to arguing in favour of absolute free speech. That words which directly provoke violence or which directly threaten the maintenance of public order deserve censure is unquestionable, especially given India’s constitutional structure. But that is not what the offence of sedition seeks to achieve. At its core, it is a devastating provision that is meant to assist in crushing all opposition to the ruling www.ijmer.in
48
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
dispensation. Its use continued to have the effect of chilling free speech and expression in India. The entire delineation as cited supra divulged that Sec 124 A of the IPC negates the right to dissent, which is a sine qua non condition of any reasonable government. Thus by reckoning the above reasonable and rational debate, Sec 124 A is “anti-India” , that is opposed and vitiate to the very basic and fundamental idea of a legitimate, liberal democratic State. Therefore it is sincerely extrapolates that the Govt of India in the very vicinity future, may either to be modified with reference to the present Indian contact or to be struck down in the interest of the larger public. In this connection it is suo loco to mention here the dictum of Charles Ewans Hughes as “a dissent in a court of last reference is an appeal to the brooding spirit of law, to the intelligence of a further day”. Therefore a democracy without a dissenter in it is impossible. Freemen, in the exercise of free thought, will give vent in free speech. No matter how abhorrent the thought, or its manner of expression, a mature democracy will tolerate it and even encourage its publication. A truly free nation will confidently view even its advocated destruction as a bad idea that will fail in the market place of ideas. Before epilogue, it is an apt to quote here the gist of Article 19 of the COI as “Everyone has the right to freedom of opinions without interference and to seek, receive and impart information and ideas through any media and regardless of frontiers”. References: S.No.
Name of the news papers
Date
P No
1
The Hindu – Editorial
16.02.16
10
2
The Hindu
30.01.16
10
3
The Hindu
25.02.16
10
www.ijmer.in
49
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
S.No.
Name of the news papers
Date
P No
4
The Hindu – perspective
16.03.16
11
5
The Hindu – letters to the Editor
25.11.15
10
6
The Hindu – letters to the Editor
15.02.16
10
7
The Hindu
28.02.16
11
8
The Hindu – perspective
02.03.16
11
9
The Hindu – Editorial
18.01.16
4
10
The Hindu – Editorial
24.09.15
10
11
The Hindu – Editorial
02.02.16
10
12
The Hindu – Editorial
04.03.16
10
13
The Hindu
17.03.16
1, 12
14
The Hindu – Editorial
18.03.16
10
15
The Hindu
10.04.16
3
16
The Hindu – Editorial
29.02.16
10
17
The Hindu – perspective
25.02.16
11
18
The Hindu – letters to the Editor
05.03.16
10
19
The Hindu – letters to the Editor
25.03.16
9
20
The Hindu – Editorial
17.02.16
10
21
The Hindu – Nation column
07.03.16
9
22
Eenadu
15.03.16
4
www.ijmer.in
50
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Other References: 1. ‘Sedition’ under IPC, 1860 2. ‘Sedition law to be repealed’ Radio Newzealand 07.05.2007 3. “The Law Commission, Treason, Sedition and allied offences”working paper No: 72 4. “Sedition and Treason: the difference between the two” IBN Live, 25th Oct, 2010 5. “The Constitution of India , 1950” – professional Book Publishers, Delhi (2011).
www.ijmer.in
51
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
A STUDY OF CAUSES OF HIV-AIDs CHALLENGES IN INDIAN CONTEXT WITH EMPHASIS ON WOMEN RELEATED ISSUES S.Sreenivasa Rao Research Scholar Dr.B.R.Ambedkar College of Law Andhra University Visakhapatnam Abstract: An attempt has been made to have an in depth study of the HIV/Aids problems in India1-8. Feasible solutions concerning socio-legal aspects have been suggested keeping in mind issues of human rights. Comparisons with other countries like Australia have been made to plan an improvement of the present scenario9-10. Key points: HIV, AIDs, Socio-legal, NACO, STDs. Introduction Human society has experienced many upheavals in the last five millennia. Diseases have been the cause of destruction of many centers of civilization. In the current age, no disease has been more dangerous than AIDS in the sheer magnitude of its spread across the globe11-12. Ever since it has been detected in the mid nineteen eighties, the cause of worry has never been less regarding this rampant epidemic. The cause’s found so far centre on promiscuity and unsafesex. Side causes are transmission through mother or injections .The root cause is related to the sexual habits .It is obvious that a saint or celibate person cannot contact such problems as he is she is free of sexual interaction1315 . Heterosexual sex16-18 is pushed into the sideline once the reason shifts to
homosexuality
involving
penetration
.From
the
sociologic
perspective. The whole issue ideally spreading is avoidable if sufficient education is provided and if adequate restraint is maintained. This www.ijmer.in
52
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
paper seeks to have a comprehensive look at the status of AIDS19-21 including the angle of human rights21-22. In 1986 when 20,000 cases of AIDS23 were reported all over the world there was no such report in India. Later in the same year first case was reported among sex workers in Chennai. Contact with tourists was found to be the main cause24-28 .In 1987, National AIDS control program (NACO) was launched .In that year, 52907 cases were tested with 135 being found to be HIV positive. Actually 14 were found to have AIDS. Drug users of Manipur, Mizoram & Nagaland had higher percentage other than heterosexual cases28-30. In the 1990s there were more numbers of cases ever covering low risk section such as housewives and affluent section of society. National AIDs prevention & control policy was taken into in 2001 .NACO report of 2004 exposed that the number of persons living with the disease had gave up from 0.2 million to 3.86 million in ten years .Totally 5.1 million cases were enumerated by 200331-35. Pattern By 2004, concentration was in 7 states: antenatal occurrence was 1% in Tamil Nadu36-38, Maharashtra, Karnataka39-42, and Andhra Pradesh43. North eastern states had a heterogeneous pattern .In the first for sates, there was some part of stability where as in other states, the percentage of growth was high. Amongst the sex works the percentage was 14% in Karnataka, 19% in Andhra Pradesh44. Mother to child transmission of in Andhra Pradesh, Telangana, and Karnataka is quite high. 45% of children born of HIV infected mothers are susceptible to the virus. (Early inteventation is required during 1st stage of pregnancy)45-50. Transmission can be in pregnancy, delivery and breast feeding. Medicine is mandatory for 6 weeks. According NACO 21,000 children are born HIV every year in India.1, 16,000 adults and 14,500 children were affected by HIV during www.ijmer.in
53
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
2011.Children below 15 account 7% of all infections 80% of there are in 15-47 group.(39% are women).Cases are high in Krishna, Godavari, Guntur51-59. NACO and APSACS are working hard in these areas60. In 2012-2013, 627330 female sex workless were tested for HIV. Of 72,443 with HIV positive. 39,741 belonged to these 4 districts [1].1,12,00 HIV positive persons were detected four districts destructs.1,806 are born with infection / (1.675 celebrated 1st birth day).Truck drivers / unprotected sex types of male to male sexworkers transgender were found to be in the most affected .139 HIV +ve women’s delivered infection free kids surprisingly61-65 . Analysis of the causes Lack of education, inabtily to control ones desires low social status of women in resisting sexual assault, compulsion to be in flesh trade are few instances of the basic causes behind AIDs propagation. Comparatively, women66 are more vulnerable to the disease in case of AIDs67-69. Male to female transmission is at least two times as effective as female to male transmission. For other STDs male to female transmission is nearly 15% more effective than female to male transmission70-73. For heterosexual transmission the rate infection is higher than the opposite gender .Again the possibilities of affecting the child exists. Mostly of the women are guided by male partners in matters of sexual activity .Condoms became less acceptable to men .High status of women and their independence are prerequisite to elimination of AIDs ┼74 . Flesh trade brings immense possibilities of spreading of the diseases. Some women have sexual relationship in the return of gifts in cash or kind. Some do if for other favors. Full time sex workers can have over thousand partners in a year75-80. In the whole life time a www.ijmer.in
54
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
commercial sex workers may have over 30000 bed mates. Due to lack of choice most of the low income sex workers have to surrender to unsafe sex has per the wishes of the customers81-85. Even some means have the feeling that of the have intercourse with goring fresh girls or virgins, Aids, SIDS will be cured. For this purpose they delibrilately force a luren girls even at some price. Highways in India are one of the major conducts many women operate on the highways for commercial sex. Even some of them get into trucks86-88, entertain the customers and change over to some other trucks with other customers. At various points on the highway, village’s women stay for solicit. The network of such activity is even more elaborate than normal prostitution of brothels. Women who insist on condoms are often physically intimidated or rejected90-95. There are many cases where women have to resort to suppression of STDs of symptomatic type for the fear of being identified as sex workers. Usage of non-barriers methods of contraceptive or unnecessary blood transfusion can also influence the possibilities of AIDs96-100. Summing up lower states of awareness is helped by some facts listed below. 1. Lack of financial independence. 2. Limited chance of movements. 3. Lower literacy 4. Limited access to information 5. Limited to access to health centers 6. Submissive attitude to sexual relation 7.
Physic social, cultural, legal barriers are important
101-105
features
www.ijmer.in
. 55
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
For women, some suggested methods are 1. Female condom vermicide has to be encouraged. 2. Education material should be properly distributed. 3. Sexual partners should be limited. 4. Counseling workers by support of NGO teams106-110. Legal help for women 1. In 1989, AID prevention bill was introduced in the Parliament this had 12 clauses and preamble. It was the first to define the prevention and spread of AIDs. At present article 15(3), article 23 of fundamental right say that state will make special provision for women & children. 2. Suppression of Immoral Traffic (prevention) act of 1956 exists for penalizing work doers .However this act has never been properly enforced due to the poverty of the sex workers. 3. Legal suggestions have been made regarding license system for the commercial sex workers. This license can be renewed according to the health of the particular person. 4. Article 38 of the constitution requires the state to the direct the policy for improving livelihood of all the citizens. Article 47 further stresses on the government duty of health care. Alternate jobs could be provided to the commercial sexworkers. The patients surely deserve financial and help. Issue of Human Rights Some issue regularly AIDs are found to be inconsistent with international human rights.These may be summarized as per the following: 1. Disturbance of rights concerned with liberty & securing. www.ijmer.in
56
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
2. Interference with individual’s right to privacy. 3. Disruption of human rights regular freedom of movement111. There are some measures which can be enforced as per intenrahent human rights & standards: a) Voluntary testing of the individual for HIV infection having strict safeguard for confidential. b) Connelly of individual (before & after testing) c) Treatment to mitigate the effects of HIV infection. d) Modifications of the behavior of HIV-infected individual for prevent virus treasuring112. Evaluation of the existing status. The
dreadful
impacts
of
AIDs
need
not
to
be
underestimated. Throughout the world it has been terror source. In India the scrid impact is very deep. As compared to the western countries we have a better serial pattern based of family values. AIDs have practically hit us below the belt. It has destroyed the family life of many persons. Doubts lack of trust, suppression of facts, blatant untainted are all results of these phenomenon. Even the matters of inheritance have become complicated113-115. Divorce rates are giving up due to the presence fears of AIDs in the spouse. Precious little has been done so far in the matter of freeing the society form the fear of AIDs. We have to accept that it has destroyed our faith in us for the last 40 years refer in table 1. The time period it takes appear is a very dangerous factor in the knowing whether to has extend in the system or not.
www.ijmer.in
57
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Legally spreading we do not have any senior provisions. Patients are by denied treatment. Person with minimum suspicion are buying removed jobs. Partners in the family life are being harassed regularly parents to children relations are at stake116. A comprehensive sociological study would help the matters has these stared today. Prevention steps need to be taken from the medical angle to limit the spreading of the disease117. The important factors are:1. AIDs detected cases have to be adopted by the state authorities. They have to be taken care of financially and physically. 2. Complete education must be imparted regarding desirable sexual habits. This can prevent AIDs this can present. Condoms and circumcision have both a positive impact. Encouragement should be made in this regarding. The prepuce in men covers lot of goers which ultimately causes many altimeters in women partners*. 3. Strict law must be applied for cases of harassment of AIDs patients in hospitals, and work places. 4.
Counseling should be given to discordant spouses so that they can lead a married life in case even one of these is affected.
5. Jails, hostels, areas of transgender must be sensitized with respect to homosexual conduct. Even female sex workers providing anal pleasure need to be sensitized in this matter.
www.ijmer.in
58
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
6. Laws must be implemented to provide suitable jobs for the able bodied HIV cases so that they make respectable living. 7. Prenatal chasing must be love slotted the child is taken care of in an early stages. “What cannot be cured must be endured”. This is the logic which is applicable the present situation. We have to live with this problem until we develop the will power to stop it completely. This will power is of two types- one of the state and the other of the people118. S.No
Type of exposure
Estimated risk
1
Receptive Anal Intercourse
≤3% (1/125 to 1/31)(De Gruttola et al. 1989)
2
Receptive Vaginal Intercourse
≤0.1% (1/2000 to 1/677)(Mastro et al.1994;Wiley.Herschkorn,and Padian 1989)
Incentive Vaginal or
≤0.1%(1/3,000 to 1/1,111)(Nagachinta
Anal Intercourse
et al.1997; Peterman et al.1988)
4
Need lestick Injury
=0.3% (1/313)(Henderson et al.1990)
5
Use of contaminated injecting Drug equipment
=0.6% (1/149)(Kaplan and Heimer 1992)
3
Table 1. Estimated HIV transmission by exposure [4] Australian way As a case study of developed society, let us consider the Australian approach. The state government of New South Wales has identified methods in which the natural laws will be harmoniously incorporated.
www.ijmer.in
59
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
With the National HIV/AIDs strategies119-123. The recommendation could be summarized as. a) Regularization / decriminalization of brothels. b) Controlling the public health structures of sex workers c) Sexworkers to be brought under the industrial relations act d) Privacy of the HIV/AIDs patients and improvement in redressal against discrimination in workplace. e) Abolition of laws which make it an offence asdmistrator drugs to our self. f) Investigates of the medicinal use of marijuana. g) To drop the compulsory tests for HIV imprison. h) Promote safety prisms by distribution of condom i) Euthausin. j) Distribution of condom to sexually active children k) Legal recognition of homosexual elements sexual impact. Conclusion Challenge of this century could be possible elimination of HIV/AIDs menace. In the past, we have eradicated the problems of cholera, malaria & even leprosy which were dreaded few decades few decades ago. A comprehensive, dedicated approach based on strong political will power is required to ensure improvement of the present situation. In this study, many causes effect & solutions for this challenge has been suggested .Based on these a frame work can be developed for amelioration of the socio-legal aspects with emphasis on human rights.
www.ijmer.in
60
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
References : 1. 2.
3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
13. 14.
15.
16.
A single injection of anti-HIV-1 antibodies protects against repeated SHIV challenges. "A comparative assessment of generalized anxiety, conduct and peer relationship problems among AIDS and other orphaned children in India." BMC psychiatry 16, no. 1 (2016): 330. "HIV/AIDS in women and children in India." Oral diseases 22, no. S1 (2016): 19-24. Research protocol for an epidemiological study on estimating disease burden of pediatric HIV in Belgaum district, India." BMC public health 16, no. 1 (2016): 1. Lessons from HIV/AIDS and Climate Change."International Studies Quarterly (2016): sqv022. "Rights of Children in India: Problem and Prospects."International Journal of Innovative Research and Development 5, no. 6 (2016). "The social impact of HIV/AIDS in India." Oral diseases 22, no. S1 (2016): 15-18. "How People and Governments Respond to Health Crises." (2016). National Family Health Survey (NFHS-3) India: Arunachal Pradesh. No. id: 8693. 2016. National Family Health Survey (NFHS-3) India: Arunachal Pradesh. No. id: 8693. 2016. An Introduction to the Health of Two-Spirit People: Historical, contemporary and emergent issues." (2016). "New insights into HIV epidemic in South Africa: key findings from the National HIV Prevalence, Incidence and Behaviour Survey, 2012." Mental Health Needs Assessment of Home‐Based Female Sex Workers in Rural India. Adult Children of Same-Sex and Heterosexual Couples: Demographic “Thriving”." Journal of GLBT Family Studies (2016): 1-15. "Women’s Sexual Agency and the Law of Rape in the 21st Century." In Special Issue: Feminist Legal Theory, pp. 63-111. Emerald Group Publishing Limited, 2016. Gender, Society, and Sexuality." InSexuality, Disability, and the Law, pp. 119-143. Palgrave Macmillan US, 2016.
www.ijmer.in
61
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
"Human rights violations among men who have sex with Men in Southern Africa: comparisons between legal contexts." PloS one 11, no. 1 (2016): e0147156. 18. Effect of nondisclosure of HIV status in sexual health clinics on unlinked anonymous HIV prevalence estimates in England, 2005– 2009." AIDS 30, no. 1 (2016): 145-149. 19. "Is it getting better? An analytical method to test trends in health disparities, with tobacco use among sexual minority vs. heterosexual youth as an example." International journal for equity in health 15, no. 1 (2016): 1. 20. "Technology-Facilitated Sexual Violence A Literature Review of Empirical Research." Trauma, Violence, & Abuse (2016): 1524838016650189. 21. AIDS in India: recent trends in opportunistic infections." (1998). 22. AIDS awareness in blood donors in North India." Transfusion Medicine 5, no. 4 (1995): 267-271. 23. Dynamics of knowledge and attitudes about AIDS among the educated in southern India." AIDS care 9, no. 3 (1997): 319-330. 24. Profile of central nervous system pathology in patients with AIDS: an autopsy study from India." AIDS 12, no. 3 (1998): 309-313. 25. AIDS IN JAMMU An Epidemiological Profile." (2000). 26. Health care systems in transition III. India, Part II. The current status of HIV-AIDS in India." Journal of Public Health Medicine 22, no. 1 (2000): 33-37. 27. HIV/AIDS and development: case studies and a conceptual framework. 28. Treatment of autoimmune diseases, including AIDS, by removal of interferon. TNFs and receptors therefor." 29. Current situation of HIV/AIDS in India and our response."Journal, Indian Academy of Clinical Medicine 7, no. 1 (2006): 13-15. 30. "HIV/AIDS in India: Problem and Response." Journal of Health Management 5, no. 2 (2003): 191-203. 31. "HIV/AIDS in Manipur: Some issues and concerns." Journal H & D 1 (2005). 32. A geographical perspective on HIV/AIDS in India." Geographical Review 92, no. 1 (2002): 114-126. 33. "AIDS in India: Some statistics." Ishani 1, no. 5 (2005). 34. A review of the HIV epidemic in India." AIDS Education and Prevention 16, no. Supplement A (2004): 155. 17.
www.ijmer.in
62
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
India's HIV-1 epidemic."Canadian Medical Association Journal 171, no. 11 (2004): 1337-1338. 36. Searching for justice for body and self in a coercive environment: sex work in Kerala, India." Reproductive health matters 12, no. 23 (2004): 58-67. 37. Social development of commercial sex workers in India: an essential step in HIV/AIDS prevention."AIDS patient care and STDs 18, no. 3 (2004): 159-168. 38. Break the silence: HIV/AIDS knowledge, attitudes, and educational needs among Arab university students in United Arab Emirates." Journal of Adolescent Health 40, no. 6 (2007): 572-e1. 39. Going beyond “ABC” to include “GEM”: critical reflections on progress in the HIV/AIDS epidemic." American journal of public health 97, no. 1 (2007): 13-18. 40. Health work, female sex workers and HIV/AIDS: Global and local dimensions of stigma and deviance as barriers to effective interventions." Social science & medicine 66, no. 8 (2008): 18481862. 41. Targeting commercial sex-workers in Goa, India: time for a strategic rethink?." The Lancet 364, no. 9442 (2004): 1297-1299. 42. Oral manifestations in HIV/AIDS infected patients from India." Oral diseases 12, no. 6 (2006): 537-542. 43. Sociocultural and behavioral contexts of condom use in heterosexual married couples in India: challenges to the HIV prevention program." Health Education & Behavior 31, no. 1 (2004): 101-117. 44. Gender inequity in health: why it exists and how we can change it." (2008): 1-12. 45. Power, community mobilization, and condom use practices among female sex workers in Andhra Pradesh, India." Aids 22 (2008): S109S116. 46. High risk of HIV in non-brothel based female sex workers in India." BMC public health 5, no. 1 (2005): 1. 47. HIV/AiDS in Asia." The Lancet 364, no. 9428 (2004): 69-82. 48. Trends in HIV-1 in young adults in south India from 2000 to 2004: a prevalence study." The Lancet 367, no. 9517 (2006): 1164-1172. 49. The number of HIV-infected individuals decreases by half in India: impact on the global epidemiology of HIV/AIDS." Future 2, no. 5 (2008): 395-398.
35.
www.ijmer.in
63
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Globalizing queer? AIDS, homophobia and the politics of sexual identity in India." Globalization and health 3, no. 1 (2007): 1. 51. AIDS in South Asia: understanding and responding to a heterogeneous epidemic. World Bank Publications, 2006. 52. An introduction to TB-HIV collaborative activities in India."NTI Bull 44 (2008). 53. Antenatal HIV Testing for Prevalence in the Remote District of Rural Andhra Pradesh and Treatment Prophylaxis with Nevirapine. 54. Vulnerability re-assessed: The changing face of sex work in Guntur district, Andhra Pradesh." AIDS care 25, no. 3 (2013): 378-384. 55. Etiology of opportunistic respiratory tract infections in patients suffering with HIV/AIDS from a tertiary care hospital, Chinakakani, Andhra Pradesh." (2015). 56. Impact of an intensive HIV prevention programme for female sex workers on HIV prevalence among antenatal clinic attenders in Karnataka state, south India: an ecological analysis." Aids 22 (2008): S101-S108. 57. AIDS Communication in India: More Than a Health Issue." Media Asia 31, no. 4 (2004): 231-238. 58. Determinants of HIV prevalence among female sex workers in four south Indian states: analysis of cross-sectional surveys in twentythree districts." Aids 22 (2008): S35-S44. 59. Novel HIV prevention strategies: the case for Andhra Pradesh." Indian journal of medical microbiology 26, no. 1 (2008): 1. 60. A comparison of female sex work, condom use and exposure to programmed interventions in 3 Indian districts." Bangalore, India: Charme Working Paper 6 (2009): 5. 61. A Study on Knowledge and Awareness about HIV/AIDS among First Year Medical Students in Guntur, Andhra Pradesh." Indian Journal of Public Health Research & Development5, no. 3 (2014): 45. 62. Sex Work and HIV/AIDS in Andhra Pradesh." 63. Study of Seroprevalence of HIV among Tuberculosis Patients and Clinico-Radiological Implications Of Dual Infections. 64. A report on mortality cases of HIV infected children attending govt. General hospital, Vijayawada, Andhra Pradesh, India. 65. Night Claims the Godavari." Aidsutra: Untold Stories from India (2008): 37-56 50.
www.ijmer.in
64
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016 66.
67.
68.
69.
70. 71.
72.
73. 74.
75.
76.
77. 78. 79.
Relationship between mobility, violence and HIV/STI among female sex workers in Andhra Pradesh, India." BMC Public Health 12, no. 1 (2012): 1. The role of housing in determining HIV risk among female sex workers in Andhra Pradesh, India: considering women’s life contexts." Social science & medicine 72, no. 5 (2011): 710-716. Social development of commercial sex workers in India: an essential step in HIV/AIDS prevention."AIDS patient care and STDs 18, no. 3 (2004): 159-168. Police-related experiences and HIV risk among female sex workers in Andhra Pradesh, India." Journal of Infectious Diseases 204, no. supply 5 (2011). Survivors of Sex Trafficking in Andhra Pradesh Evidence and Testimony." Indian Journal of Gender Studies 18, no. 2 (2011). Experience of violence and adverse reproductive health outcomes, HIV risks among mobile female sex workers in India." BMC public health 11, no. 1 (2011). ┼ HIV epidemic has formed to occur in “waves” depend on demopagraphic conditions .Due to such variations, and single vaccine is not feasible for all regions. Sex behaviour of men who have sex with men and risk of HIV in Andhra Pradesh, India." Aids 19, no. 6 (2005): 611-619. Power, community mobilization, and condom use practices among female sex workers in Andhra Pradesh, India." Aids 22 (2008): S109-S116. Factors associated with awareness and utilisation of a community mobilisation intervention for female sex workers in Andhra Pradesh, India." Sexually transmitted infections 86, no. Suppl 1 (2010). Violence against female sex workers in Karnataka state, south India: impact on health, and reductions in violence following an intervention program." BMC public health 10, no. 1 (2010): 1. "Health GIS and HIV/AIDS studies: Perspective and retrospective." Journal of biomedical informatics42, no. 4 (2009). Sex and social justice. Oxford University Press, 1999. Community empowerment among female sex workers is an effective HIV prevention intervention: a systematic review of the peerreviewed evidence from low-and middle-income countries." AIDS and Behavior 17, no. 6 (2013).
www.ijmer.in
65
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016 80.
81.
82. 83. 84.
85. 86. 87. 88. 89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
Sex worker-led structural interventions in India: a case study on addressing violence in HIV prevention through the Ashodaya Samithi collective in Mysore." The Indian journal of medical research 135, no. 1 (2012). Motivations for entry into sex work and HIV risk among mobile female sex workers in India." Journal of biosocial science43, no. 05 (2011). The global impact of HIV/AIDS." Nature 410, no. 6831 (2001). AIDS epidemic update: December 2009. WHO Regional Office Europe, 2009. Prevalence of syphilis and human immunodeficiency virus infections among men who have sex with men in Shenzhen, China: 2005 to 2007." Sexually transmitted diseases 35, no. 12 (2008). Pleasure and prevention: when good sex is safer sex." Reproductive Health Matters 14, no. 28 (2006). HIV risk and preventive interventions in transgender women sex workers." The Lancet 385, no. 9964 (2015). High risk of HIV in non-brothel based female sex workers in India." BMC public health 5, no. 1 (2005). Global prescriptions: gendering health and human rights. Zed Books, 2003. Migration/mobility and risk factors for HIV among female sex workers in Andhra Pradesh, India: implications for HIV prevention." International journal of STD & AIDS 23, no. 4 (2012): e7-e13 Searching for justice for body and self in a coercive environment: sex work in Kerala, India." Reproductive health matters 12, no. 23 (2004). HIV infection dynamics in rural Andhra Pradesh south India: a sexual-network analysis exploratory study." AIDS care 19, no. 9 (2007). Social development of commercial sex workers in India: an essential step in HIV/AIDS prevention."AIDS patient care and STDs 18, no. 3 (2004). Social development of commercial sex workers in India: an essential step in HIV/AIDS prevention."AIDS patient care and STDs 18, no. 3 (2004). Poverty, debt and Africa’s HIV/AIDS crisis." International Affairs 78, no. 3 (2002).
www.ijmer.in
66
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
At the nexus of human rights and development: new methods and strategies of global NGOs." World Development 31, no. 12 (2003). 96. The shifting politics of foreign aid." International affairs 81, no. 2 (2005). 97. The global impact of scaling up HIV/AIDS prevention programs in low-and middle-income countries." Science 311, no. 5766 (2006). 98. Decreases in community viral load are accompanied by reductions in new HIV infections in San Francisco." PloS one 5, no. 6 (2010). 99. On becoming a male sex worker in Mysore: Sexual subjectivity, “empowerment,” and community‐based HIV prevention research." Medical anthropology quarterly 23, no. 2 (2009). 100. The female sex work typology in India in the context of HIV/AIDS." Tropical Medicine & International Health 14, no. 6 (2009). 101. Correlates of partner violence among female street-based sex workers: substance abuse, history of childhood abuse, and HIV risks." AIDS patient care and STDs 15, no. 1 (2001). 102. Epidemiology of male same-sex behaviour and associated sexual health indicators in low-and middle-income countries: 2003–2007 estimates."Sexually transmitted infections 84, no. Suppl 1 (2008). 103. Can sex workers regulate police? Learning from an HIV prevention project for sex workers in southern India." Social science & medicine 68, no. 8 (2009). 104. Facing the challenge: household responses to HIV/AIDS in Mumbai, India." AIDS care 11, no. 1 (1999). 105. A review of the HIV epidemic in India." AIDS Education and Prevention 16, no. Supplement A (2004). 106. Women's lives and sex: implications for AIDS prevention." Culture, medicine and psychiatry 17, no. 4 (1993). 107. Health work, female sex workers and HIV/AIDS: Global and local dimensions of stigma and deviance as barriers to effective interventions." Social science & medicine 66, no. 8 (2008). 108. Health work, female sex workers and HIV/AIDS: Global and local dimensions of stigma and deviance as barriers to effective interventions." Social science & medicine 66, no. 8 (2008). 109. Dhandha, dharma and disease: traditional sex work and HIV/AIDS in rural India." Social science & medicine 59, no. 4 (2004). 95.
www.ijmer.in
67
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
HIV and AIDS-related stigma and discrimination: a conceptual framework and implications for action." Social science & medicine 57, no. 1 (2003). 111. The voices of battered women in India." Violence Against Women 11, no. 6 (2005). 112. High risk of HIV in non-brothel based female sex workers in India." BMC public health 5, no. 1 (2005) 113. Legal knowledge, needs, and assistance seeking among HIV positive and negative women in Umlazi, South Africa." BMC international health and human rights 16, no. 1 (2016): 1. st 114. Deccan Chronicle 1 December 2014. 115. Padma: Women & AIDs –Need for emergency of legal measure & their enforceability (SCJ vol3 part 2 Oct 1997 & J42 SCJL). 116. Prabhu, B.A, HIV/AIDs: Spousal relationship in discordant couples. Health Care: Policy, Ethics & Law. 117. Direction on development human development “HIV and AIDs in South Asia”. An Economic Development Risk. 118. Press Council Report regarding AIDs & the media. 119. AIDs in India: Shilaga Nagendra. 120. As per the study of AIIMS, almost all the cerusical problems in women are caused by the unclean conditions of male organ. A preventive measure is to adopt and encourage circumfusion getting over social barriers .this will take care of unprotected sex to a large extent. 121. Discordant couples are divided into a) couples with HIV-positive husband and HIV –negative wife.b) Couples with HIV positive wife & HIV-regarding husband .In a male dominating social strep like Indian case, discordance pattern is of the first legal. 122. Indian feminisms: Law, patriarchies and violence in India. Routledge, 2016. 123. "Kaposi Sarcoma Risk in HIV-Infected Children and Adolescents on Combination Antiretroviral Therapy from Sub-Saharan Africa, Europe, and Asia." 110.
www.ijmer.in
68
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
UNDERSTANDING OF HUMAN BEING ACCORDING TO GANDHI A.V.Krishna Rao Director MSFS Dhyanashram A Center for Spirituality and Renewal Visakhapatnam It is true that we, human beings are the only creatures, who wonder about everything around us. We, being self-conscious beings, always strive to understand ourselves better and better. By our capacity to understand our way of life, we help one another and make our life meaningful. I would feel that every one of us need to go on to find greater meaning in our daily activities, in spite of our weaknesses and position in life. Here I would like to mention S.K. Kim’s words about Gandhi. He has mentioned that Gandhi was not born great, but he made himself great, through struggle and experiment, especially with the qualities of love of truth and love of fellow beings. I would believe that Gandhi lived a meaningful life not just by his thoughts alone but by his practical way of life too. So, in this second chapter I deal with Gandhi’s understanding of human being. He is one of the great members of the history who strived a lot for the wellbeing of the humanity. I would mention Gandhi’s definition of human beings and his understanding of human beings as special and sacred beings from all other beings. I also would mention his emphasis of the law of life and the power of humans to know one’s goodness in order to take part in the Divine nature by living a just and meaningful life, and to dignify one another with due honour. Gandhi’s Definition of Human Being Devis Kavungal, in his research of Gandhi’s understanding of human being, has mentioned Gandhi’s view of human being. Devis writes, “Man is a special creation of God precisely to the extent that he www.ijmer.in
69
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
is distinct from the rest of His creation. He also has mentioned that every human being is the measure of all things in the sarvodaya (welfare of all) system, because of his or her divine nature. K.N. Tiwari, a writer, has mentioned Gandhi’s view of human being. Tiwari mentions, “We were born with brute strength, but we were born in order to realize God who dwells in us. That indeed is the privilege of man and it distinguishes him from the lower animals. By now, we clearly understand Gandhi’s great positive view of human being as very image and part of God and very special being than any other beings. Concept of Human Being K.N. Tiwari says that human being is a great being and has unveiled many mysteries, but not the mystery of his or her own nature. Great thinkers like August Compete, Niebuhr, Jean Paul Sartre, Karl Marx and many others have made attempts to understand human nature, but perhaps none of them could understand perfectly. He has said about different religious views of human being. Hinduism gives prior importance to human soul, which is the very essence of every individual as the Divine spark within him or her. The Advaita doctrine takes human soul and Brahman as identical. The Mahabharata says that there is nothing higher than human being on this earth. Christianity says that human being was made on the last day of creation and God made human beings in His own image. K.N. Tiwari, further has mentioned Gandhi’s concept of human being in the light of these different religious beliefs. Gandhi’s view of human being in a very exalted and idealized from. However, Gandhi accepts the animal nature and spiritual nature of every human. For him, human being is a mixture of both animal and spiritual forces. He accepts the animal nature of human being because of his belief in the theory of evolution. K.N. Tiwari says that Gandhi has a firm belief in the spirituality and the rationality of human being, because of which no one could go www.ijmer.in
70
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
down beyond a limit. He also says about Gandhi as an optimistic towards the view of human nature by even believing a worst human too to be reformed and brought to right track. Therefore, Gandhi, being an optimistic person, has great hopes for the well-being of every individual. He gives due respect to everyone. He has encouraged the people to progress their way of lives in a better way. He also hopes for the oneness of humankind with proper dignity. We shall understand his better views of humankind in the following subheadings. Dignity of Human Being Devis through his study on Gandhi’s vision of human being has mentioned that the human being is an incarnate spirit possessing a body and a soul. Since every human has a soul, he or she is essentially a spiritual being and basically good. The talents of a human being are endless and matchless because of the soul he or she has. However, one’s dignity depends on his or her relationship to God, because God is the foundation of his or her existence, nature and activity. One cannot understand the full dignity of his or her nature without proper relation to God and to fellow beings. I would believe that Gandhi has seen the human’s progress in their way of lives to dignify themselves. I also would believe that Gandhi has encouraged everyone to live a dignified life by the constant struggles and progress in daily activities. Concept of Human Progress Dr. Jainendra Singh has spoken about how the Indian Philosophy of history believes in the gradual progress of human being towards ahimsa. If we turn our eyes to the time of Indian history, we find our remote ancestors who were cannibals and lived on chase. In the next stage, human being was ashamed of leading the life of a wandering hunter. Then human being started to work hard and depend on the agriculture for daily food. Thus, from being a nomad, human beings settled down to civilized stable life, founded villages, and towns, www.ijmer.in
71
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
and form members of a family, became members of a community and a nation. All these are signs of human progress towards non-violence and diminution of violence. Rajendra Prasad Singh has written that the development of human’s knowledge about nature and self have begun from the primitive stage to a civilized state of humanity for his or her well-being. He also has mentioned Gandhi’s view of human progress. He has said that for Gandhi a country people can be prosperous and free when they easily earn enough to meet their needs. Unless poverty and unemployment are wiped out from India, he does not agree that we have attained freedom. For him real wealth does not mean jewelry and money, but in providing for proper food, clothes, education and creating healthy condition of living for every one of us. In whatever position we are, Gandhi accepts the goodness of the prophets and avatars, who taught us the lesson of ahimsa more or less. He had said that not one of them has professed to teach himsa. Of course, himsa not need to be taught. Human as animal is violent, but as spirit is non-violent. He also has said that the moment he or she awakes to the spirit within, one cannot remain violent. That is why the prophets and avatars have taught the lesson of truth, harmony, brotherhood, justice and so on to accept one another and live in one unity. Oneness of Human Being Devis in the findings of his study of Gandhi’s concept of human being, has mentioned the philosophical basis of Gandhi’s call to love and serve others is, for the oneness of humanity. There is oneness of humanity because the soul of every individual participates in the same God. There is an underlying unity of all humankind because every human being is the individuation of the same soul. All the individual souls are parts of the Supreme Soul. Gandhi states, “The soul is one in www.ijmer.in
72
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
all. Its possibilities are therefore the same for everyone”. It points that the entire human race belongs to one family and has the same human nature. In Gandhi’s autobiography, I have come across his openmindedness and equal respect to every individual. He shows no distinctions, when he was in Durban he was with Hindus, Christians and Mussalmans. He treated them as his kith and kin or as members of his family. Devis further has mentioned, for Gandhi, the universal brotherhood is to be achieved here on earth through interpersonal relationships based on mutual giving and taking. This mutual sharing and cooperation always aim at global welfare. Aims of Human Being S.K. Kim has mentioned Gandhi’s view of humans’ aim of life. For Gandhi, human being’s ultimate aim is the realization of God. All human activities, social, political, and religious, have to be guided by the ultimate aim of the vision of God. For Gandhi, the immediate service to all fellow beings becomes a necessary part of the endeavor, because the only way to find God is, to see God in His creation and be one with it. For him, it is possible only through service of all. He also has said that the divinity of a human being manifests according to the extent to which he or she realizes one’s humanity that is his or her oneness with his fellow beings. Devis out of his study of Gandhi, has stated that vision of God means getting an opportunity of serving humanity. It is nothing but serving the poor and making oneself blessed through service. The formless God cannot be discovered and worshipped in the lonely privacy of one’s personal life but in His creatures both big and small who are His expressions. Devis further has mentioned Gandhi’s view of human life as an aspiration to strive after perfection, which is self-realization. He has said, for Gandhi self-realization is the prime aim and duty of www.ijmer.in
73
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
human being to realize God who dwells in every one. He also says that human’s greatness lies in this God-realization by loving one another. Following Law of Love As we often experience, love is a very difficult aspect than hate. We really need our inner courage and goodness to love than hate anything or anyone. K.N. Tiwari understands Gandhi’s view of love and says that almost all are working through the medium of love and ahimsa. Love is the true nature of humankind, as Christianity believes love as the true nature of God. Humankind by working the law of love or the law of life, always goes higher and higher. S.K. Kim also understands Gandhi’s law of love and says that the law of love is against hate and is the way of non-violence. If one loves those that are affectionate to him or her, one’s actions are human. If one loves those that hate him or her, his or her actions are spiritual. He written that for Gandhi hatred and violence go together. Dr. Jainendra Yadav has written that for Gandhi, it is not non-violence, if we merely love those that love us. It is non-violence when we love those that hate us. Infact it may be difficult to follow this grand law of love, but by the grace of God, even this most difficult thing becomes easy to accomplish, if we really want to do it. Gandhi says that the law of love helps everyone to form a wellordered society that is intelligible and life worth living. It helps to keep one’s feelings under control. He says that there is always in him a conscious struggle for following the law of non-violence deliberately and ceaselessly. He also has said that the more he works at this law, the more he feels the delight in his life. For him, it is a peace and a meaning of the mysteries of nature. When I have gone through the autobiography of Gandhi, I have come across, when a leper has come to his door, he has no heart to dismiss him with a meal. He has offered him a shelter, dressed his www.ijmer.in
74
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
wounds and has begun to look after him. However, he could not go on like that indefinitely. He lacked the will to keep him always with him. Finally, he has sent him to the Government Hospital for indentured laborers. Since Gandhi has referred different religious holy books, he has mentioned how Christ drove out the money-changers from the temple of Jerusalem and drew down curses from Heaven upon the Hypocrites and the Pharisees. He also has mentioned how Buddha fearlessly carried the war into the enemy’s camp and brought down an arrogant priesthood. Here Gandhi says that Christ and Buddha have showed unmistakable, gentleness and love behind every act of theirs. They would not raise a finger against enemies, but would gladly surrender themselves to the truth for which they lived. Freedom of Human Being through Non – Violence I, in the contemporary Indian philosophy class subject, have come across Gandhi as a great political thinker and his political ideal is to reach total freedom. The goal of his Swaraj is not merely freedom from the British yoke, but freedom from every yoke of human life. He gives more importance to human freedom to make use of human’s capacity to regulate and control the authority for the fullness of human life. Devis, out of his study of Gandhi, has mentioned Gandhi’s acceptance of human’s freewill, reason, and conscience. He states that human freedom is the fundamental property to live an authentic life in the society. Only through the exercise of freedom, one can actualize one’s fullness of humanity. He further says, humans are animals endowed with reason and the power of choosing between good and evil, right and wrong, violence and non-violence, truth and untruth. Humans have the power to control and determine their actions in the context of one’s own desires and wishes. He writes that every one being www.ijmer.in
75
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
in use of freedom must live, grow and realize oneself in society, in harmony with God, in neighbour and nature. Gandhi’s view of human freedom always consists in living a life of non-violence. Human’s life is very precious, so to live that precious life freely and meaningfully Dr. Jainendra Yadav has mentioned Gandhi’s contribution in the explanation of the aspect of non-violence. He says that non-violence is a power, which can be wielded equally by all children, young men and women or grown up people, if at all they have a living faith in the God of Love and have equal love for all humankind. He says, when humans accept non-violence as the law of love, it must pervade the whole being and not be applied to isolated acts. He further mentions Gandhi’s view that non-violence cannot be taught to an individual who fears to die and has no power of resistance. So, he mentions, Gandhi’s approach to non-violence does not admit of running away from danger and leaving dear ones unprotected. His non-violence is the summit of bravery to make use of one’s freedom in the daily acts. S.R. Sharma also has written Gandhi’s conception of nonviolence, which is a more active and real fight against wickedness. He mentions, non-violence is mightier weapon of destruction. He says Gandhi’s view of life as the greatest of all gifts. He also states that one cannot enjoy this gift if he or she has no fearlessness and no one p ractices ahimsa and be a coward at the same time. That is why the practice of ahimsa calls forth the greatest courage. Ahimsa as the Aim of Human Being The literal meaning of ahimsa is non-injury, non-cruelty, non – violence, non-killing and non-coercion. For Gandhi, non-violence as love is the supreme law for human beings. Devis mentions Gandhi’s expression of the term ‘ahimsa’ which cannot be understood adequately. It is as indefinable as God is. It can only be described than defined. It is a very comprehensive term, includes the universal www.ijmer.in
76
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
supreme love, compassion, patient hearing, positive benevolence, forgiveness, interest and selfless concern in the welfare of other beings. However, it is in its essence, is the powerful emotion of the heart, which finds expression in numerous forms of service to all without expecting anything in return. S.K. Kim has mentioned Gandhi’s emphasis on Ahimsa as a way of life. He has stated that it is Gandhi’s greatest contribution, what points to the way of the spirit. It is a way of life. It can be practiced universally. It can be practiced by anyone. Even by societies or nations, because for Gandhi any principle needs to be followed by all as a whole. Gandhi, in his autobiography has written that no one can live for a moment without himsa consciously or unconsciously. One who is compassionate towards the things, one will be constantly growing in self-resistant and compassion, but he or she can never become entirely free from outward himsa. Ahimsa is the unity of all life, so, if one causes an error, if affects all. So long as one is a social being, cannot but participate in the himsa in which the very existence of society involves. However, if two nations are fighting, the duty of a votary of ahimsa good of all and die in the attempt to realize the ideal. He or she will therefore be willing to die, so that the others may live. S.K. Kim has expressed Gandhi’s call for ahimsa saying that the followers of ahimsa as their way of life must have a living faith in God, truth and non-violence. One must live a chaste life and be ready and willing, for the sake of his or her cause, to give up his or her life and possessions. One must carry out with a willing heart all the rules of discipline. S.K. Kim further has expressed that we can live a meaningful life by adopting the law of love, as Gandhi has done in his life. He has mentioned that there can be no hope for the elimination of war and destruction without this law of love.
www.ijmer.in
77
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Goodness of Human Being K.N. Tiwari, out of his study of Gandhi, has mentioned Gandhi’s firm faith in the essential goodness of human being. He says, for Gandhi, all religious people accept the essential goodness of God. Since God is essentially good, human being is also divine in his or her inner spirit, to be essentially good. Dr. Jainendra Yadav, understanding Gandhi’s view of the goodness of human being, has written that one becomes great exactly in the degree in which he or she works for the welfare of his or her fellow being. Devis understands Gandhi’s belief in the basic goodness of human being and says that the basis for the satyagraha mode of action is the inherent goodness in everyone, however cruel and wicked he or she is at the moment. He writes that a votary of satyagraha tries to touch the heart of the wrongdoer in order to bring him or her voluntarily from a sinful life to work for the sarvodaya society. The most sinful people can be converted, if their innate divine goodness and nature are aroused, by the pure and undaunted suffering of a true satyagrahi. Since Satyagraha is the force that is born of truth and nonviolence, Devis mentions Gandhi’s view of Satyagraha, which excludes every form of violence, direct or indirect, veiled or unveiled, and in thought, word, or act. He says that a truthful human cannot remain violence longer time. However, if he or she is in the slightest trace of violence, he or she will fail to find the truth, for which he or she searches. Therefore, we can once again clearly understand that to live life of truthfulness, one must live a life of ahimsa that is to love all the beings in thought, word, and action. Though Gandhi’s way of life and thoughts are practical and enriching, one may wonder by looking at the vast amount of the violence that is taking place in all areas of human life day after day. I, www.ijmer.in
78
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
in the coming chapter would deal with the relevance of the teachings of Gandhi in this modern world. I would concentrate on the violence and the injustice that is taking place in the society, the misbehavior of the political leaders by means of political power and the need of our response to this present society by encouraging one another based on Gandhi’s view of human life. References: 1. Abel
M (4 January 2005). Glimpses of Indian National
Movement. ICFAI Books. ISBN 978-81-7881-420-9. 2. Andrews, C. F. (2008) [1930]. "VII – The Teaching of
Ahimsa". Mahatma Gandhi's Ideas Including Selections from His Writings. Pierides Press. ISBN 978-1-4437-3309-0. 3. Dalton, Dennis, ed. (1996). Mahatma Gandhi: Selected Political
Writings. Hackett Publishing. ISBN 978-0-87220-330-3. 4. Duncan, Ronald, ed. (May 2011). Selected Writings of Mahatma
Gandhi. Literary Licensing, LLC. ISBN 978-1-258-00907-6. 5. Gandhi, M. K.; Fischer, Louis (2002). Louis Fischer, ed. The
Essential Gandhi: An Anthology of His Writings on His Life, Work and Ideas. Vintage Books. ISBN 978-1-4000-3050-7. 6. Gandhi, Mohandas Karamchand (1928). Satyagraha in South
Africa (in Gujarati) (1 ed.). Ahmedabad: Navajivan Publishing House. Translated by Valji G. Desai Free online access at Wikilivres.ca (1/e). Pdfs from Gandhiserve (3/e) &Yann Forget (hosted by Arvind Gupta) (1/e). 7. Gandhi, Mohandas Karamchand (1994). The Collected Works of
Mahatma Gandhi. Publications Division, Ministry of Information and Broadcasting, Govt. of India. ISBN 978-81-2300239-2. (100 volumes). Free online access from Gandhiserve.
www.ijmer.in
79
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
PROBLEMS OF WORKING WOMEN IN THE BANKING SECTOR – A STUDY IN GUNTUR DISTRICT Vani Vuyyuri Research Scholar (Ph.D.) Full Time Department of HRM Acharya Nagarjuna University Nagarjun Nagar, Guntur Abstract Banking sector is the back bone for the economical development of any country and working women, being a considerable part of the society, also played a vital role in the smooth run of banking sector. The paper focus in this research is on the “Problems faced by working women in the Banking Sector of Guntur District of Andhra Pradesh ”. The main aim of this paper to study the problems of working women with career prospects and family issues faced by the women. So the researcher has taken 120 respondents in public sector of SBI and Andhra Bank by using the statistical tools of percentage Method, Mean Values and Rank Correlation for the study. INTRODUCTION In Vedic times women occupied the highest place in society. They were given all opportunities to develop themselves, socially, intellectually and morally. They were given thorough education. Similarly there is a positive change in the present society, which is focusing on women empowerment. The progress of any country is intimately linked to its ability to develop and use its human resource effectively. This is particularly true in a developing country like India. Women, as a significant part of this human resource pool, play a vital role in the economic, social and political development of India. Nationalization of the Indian Banking Sector in 1969 served as the first major step to reduce gender discrimination against women in banking www.ijmer.in
80
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
sector and that provided opportunity for women empowerment. The pattern of Indian women's employment has changed significantly since the 1970’s. Many major Indian banks are hiring highly qualified young Indian women to their administrative levels and they are showing remarkable growth over the years. WOMEN IN BANKING SECTOR Banking today is one of the major sectors, which provide the largest employment opportunities. With the network of approximately 34,163 branches and a work force of 9 lakhs of employees and a potential for further expansion, the banks are one of the biggest employers in the country. Alongside the development of the banking industry and the generation of increasing employment opportunities in this sector, there is a significant spurt in the number of women being drawn towards the banking industry. It is noteworthy that approximately out of 221004 bank employees at the officers (executives) level as many as 9200 are women. Thus the ratio of female to male employees is 1:23. At the clerical level, 82000 out of 4,68,200 are women. The ratio of female clerks is 1:5. Against this background, it would be useful to analysis an upsurge of particular factors, which have contributed to such upsurge of women in the banking sector. The advent of women has been the result of a conscious and deliberate policy of the government of India to induct women into the main stream of economic life and to provide them maximum encouragement towards this. Thus, an important contributory factor is the impetus given by means of government policies and legislation, which confer gender equality and the absence of discrimination in matters of recruitment. With the removal of any impediments in the way of women seeking employment in banks, it is not all surprising that women are joining banks in increasing numbers. Women are considered to be an asset in the banking industry. Banking is a service industry where considerable importance is attached to customer service and www.ijmer.in
81
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
dealings with client. Where courteous and personalized service is called for, women by nature, by training and disposition are better endowed to extend such type of service than their male counterparts. Yet another important requirement is that of integrity and honesty and it is well known that women are less prone to fraud and corruption. Women are found to be sincere, conscientious and diligent in work. Even in the matters of industrial relations, women possess the needed tact and patience and human approach, which ensure healthy staff relations. Once women have voluntarily opted for the higher promotions they have not been found shirking in their responsibilities and have accepted whatever work has arisen in the course of their duties. While a number of women are entering the banking profession, nevertheless, it is true that a sizeable number do not aspire for managerial positions. Quite a sizeable number remain contented with lower level staff or supporting positions and do not seek entry into the executive cadres. What are the major reasons for this state of affairs? Obviously, ability is not the reason as their competence has even otherwise been acknowledged? It is the lack of motivation or commitment that is the major cause. Thus, women faced with a choice between the two, tend to allow family responsibilities to take precedence over work obligation. The point to be considered here is whether there is any basic conflict between the role of a woman as a mother and wife and as that of a workingwoman and whether effective handling of one can be done only at the cost of the other. There is nothing in the way of women striking a proper balance between the conflicting demands and being able to discharge both the duties efficiently and effectively. There are several women executives who are living examples to this fact. In case of married professionals, situation is much grave. Besides her professional area, she has to meet many requirement and expectations of the family from the social, obligatory emotional and psychological point of view www.ijmer.in
82
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
and she works day in and day out to maintain both the fronts. She may not be able to give up her profession due to the fact that : 1. She adds to better economical and social status of family 2. She may be aware of her capability and potential and wants to develop herself for her better career prospects; 3. She may aspire to achieve some excellence and contribute to society and nation as a whole. The policies have been positively oriented towards the development of women in the banking sector and several facilities have been extorted in this regard. The work environment is congenial and provides enough scope for all women and their success depends on their individual competence and willingness to accept the challenges. What is needed, is that the women are self-motivated, assert them and become achievers. It is entirely up to women to exploit the opportunities presented to them and to come forward to take up the challenge in larger numbers. Problems of working women The banking sector today offer more prospects for jobs for women - both qualitatively and quantitatively. However there are some common problems faced by women managers, officers and clerical groups in banking sector, in the course of their careers. These include the burden of the dual role, sexual harassment in the workplace, the refusal of men to accept women as colleagues or seniors, and the lack of solidarity among women. A lot of women play both primary breadwinner and primary care taker role which create a tension most men do not experience responsibilities.
when
juggling
work
and
personal
Women employees feel that these constraints are intensified by being forced to adopt the behaviour of the 'successful manager or officer' which has been established by men. They argue that women could find www.ijmer.in
83
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
their own strategies which would achieve the same result (Mankidy, 1988). Women frequently suffer subtle forms of discrimination that tend to get worse as they progress up the career ladder. Their lack of visibility is a disadvantage that manifests itself when job assignments and selections for training programs are made and they tend to be excluded (Goverman, 1992). Indian women managers’ expresse interest to be included in informal networks on the job (Bhatnagar, 1988) The biggest challenge lies in changing the stereotypes, assumptions and biases about what is required for leadership and success that permeate the culture of financial institutions. The senior management of financial firms have always been almost exclusively men and they remain the strongly dominant group. This means that what is in fact a gender-based bias may be perceived by most senior managers to be no more than commonsense meritocracy. These assumptions relate to both day-to-day working practices and also the qualities required for leadership. Certain behaviors are perceived differently when exhibited by men and women. For example, an assertive man might be perceived as being a strong leader whereas a similarly assertive woman might be perceived to be “strident” or “bossy” (adjectives rarely applied to men). And as pointed out earlier, the character traits traditionally associated with leadership in financial firms have been typically masculine. The discrimination experienced by women working in banks is mainly in terms of the lack of infrastructural facilities, the transfer policy, and assumptions that women would not be interested in training or in promotions. Literature Review Dr. K.A. Goyal (2015) Banking industry is an emerging industry in India, the entry of private sector and foreign banks have brought various essential changes in the banking industry. The menace of worklife imbalance is noticeable in banking industry. Employees in the banks take painful effort to deliver the various needs of its customers. www.ijmer.in
84
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Work deadlines are getting compact and the individual's jobs are loaded and added with quality output. Due to work in pressure, it becomes hard to maintain balance between professional and family life. The output of the banking sector is dependent on the quality of human resources. The basic function of human resource development is to facilitate performance improvement, measured in terms of finance indicators of operational efficiency and quality of financial services provided. The twin challenges faced by the banks' managements are that of retaining the prevailing employees and providing a satisfying work environment for all employees. The study attempts to find out the issues related with managing professional and personal life of employees in banking industry. The major objective of this paper is to identify specific issues and challenges in work life balance in banking industry and to suggest measures to improve work life balance. P. Ashok Kumar (2016 )Banking sector is the back bone for the economic development of any country and working women, being a considerable part of the society, also played a vital role in the smooth run of banking sector. The study is purely exploratory in nature and seeks to identify the problems faced by women in both the Private and Public sector banks. The phenomenal growth of banks has created massive employment opportunities for the educated unemployed youths of our nation specially women. The women job-seekers find jobs in banks more attractive and more suitable to their nature. Banks also were not only hiring them massively but even welcomed their entry because women have certain innate traits which fit in with the job requirements Objectives of the Study The study attempts to address the following key research objectives: 1. To gather knowledge about the problems and challenges faced by working women inthe workplace. www.ijmer.in
85
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
2. To specify the key demographic profile of the women employees in the banking sector. 3. To study women’s involvement in banking sectors of their positions and career growth. 4. To find out possible solutions that could help them to overcome the problems that theyface in the workplace. Methodology of the study The present study is based on secondary data and the data were collected from journals, books, news papers, RBI annual reports and other websites. The data collected from 120 respondents in banks of public sector Banks of SBI and Andhra Bank of the women employees. Table 1; Demographic profile of women employees in the banking sector Age
18-25 years
20(16.67%)
26-40 years
60(50%)
40 and above Experience
Marital Status
Educational Qualification
www.ijmer.in
40(33.33%)
< 5 years
60(50%)
5-10 years
40(33.33%)
>11 years
20(16.67%)
Married
80(66.67%)
Unmarried
40(33.33%)
Degree
65(54.16%)
Post Graduation
55(45.83%)
86
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
From the above table designs the Demographic profile of women employees in the banking sector. According to age wise respondents the researcher has taken 18-25 years are 16.67%, 26-40 years are 50%, 40 years and above are (33.33%). With the work experience of Below 5 years are 50%, Between 5-10 years are 33.33%, and 11 years are 16.67%. of the Marital status respondents Married are 66.67%, UnMarried are 33.33%. Educational qualification of the respondents Degree are 54.16%, Post Graduation are 45.83%. Table 2: Problems faced by the women employees in the Banking sector Sl.No.
Options
Mean
Rank
1.
Inevitably of conventional domestic 3.65 obligation of home maker leaving little time for career growth
4
2.
Combining domestic work and office work 3.15 leave no time for making us fit for higher post
3
3.
Physical strain necessitating longer hours of 4.12 stay in office
2
4.
Difficulty of better judgement and quick 3.20
5
Decision Making required in higher position 5.
Strain of frequent hours/field visits
2.12
6
6.
Fear of transfer which disturbs family life 4.35
1
and domestic peace
From the above table describes the problem of working women with mean values and rank of the opinions. Fear of transfer which disturbs the family life and domestic peace have occupied the first place www.ijmer.in
87
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
through transfer to other place by leaving their family. The second place is the physical strain necessitating longer hours of stay in office. The third rank combining domestic work and office work leave no time for making us fit for higher post. The fouth rank occupies the “Inevitably of conventional domestic obligation of home makes leaving little time for career growth. The fifth and sixth rank are Difficulty of better judgement and quick decision making required in the higher position. Fear of transfer which disturbs family life and domestic place. Recommendations . Management may require some training to help for the women employees for their career . Some firms are taking measures to improve awareness of gender issues, using workshops and reverse mentoring, The second, and perhaps the most important step in eliminating biases is ensuring that these assumptions about what it takes to be an effective leader do not influence hiring decisions, promotions, the allocation of career opportunities and performance evaluations. Employers who want to help women advance to the top must do more to make allowances for life outside of work. They must make sure that even ambitious and talented employees do not feel that they will have to work hours incompatible with a family life. Women in banking who require flexible working conditions need to feel emotionally empowered to take full advantage of them. Conclusion Female Employees face problems like work place harassment, gender inequality, pick and drop facility, inflexible timings, lack of maternity leaves and social limits.” Such problems can be resolved but the need is that he Government organization addresses these problems seriously in order to create the better working environment and bring efficiency and productivity of employees. Gender discrimination exists in almost entire country and possibly its worst form exists in remotest www.ijmer.in
88
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
and isolated parts of Pakistan. Physical and psychological growth, mental and emotional health and psychological well being of the women seems to be influenced by discriminatory attitudes, which tend to project this authoritarian manner in all spheres of women’s life. References 1. Bhatnagar, D. (1988). “HRD for women employees inbanks”. In A. K. Khandelwal, (ed.) Human ResourcesDevelopment in Banks. Oxford and IBH PublishingCompany, New Delhi. 2. Goverman, J. (1992). “Women in science should lookwithin”. Los Angeles Times, November 11 3. http://shodhganga.inflibnet.ac.in:8080/jspui/bitstream/10603/25502/ 7/07_chapter%201.pdf 4. Kamala Srinivasan (1991), “Women in Banking andProfessional Struggles – Women and Development”,Discovery, Vol. 1, New Delhi.rce 5. Khandelwal and Anil.K (1998), “ HumanResourceDevelopment in Banks’’Oxford and IBH Publishing company, New Delhi. 6. Mankidy, A. (1986), “Women Employees: A NewDimension to Human Resource Management in Banks”,Indian Banks' Association, Special issue 7. Mankidy, A. (1988), “Towards Better Functioning ofWomen Managers in Banks”, National Institute of BankManagement, Pune. 8. Mankidy, A. (1991), “Making space for womenmanagers”. Economic Times, 13th June 9. Parvathy. V.K.(2013), “Role of Indian women inbanking sector”, March 4, the Indian/role-of-women-inthe-bankingindustry/fus ion.htt p;//In dianfusion.aglasem.com/42173 10. Srinivas, M. N. (1978). “The Changing Position ofIndian Women”. Oxford University Press Bombay
www.ijmer.in
89
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
ANALYTICAL STUDY ON IRRIGATION FACILITIES IN PRAKASM DISTRICT OF ANDHRA PRADESH Dr.G.Somasekhara Assistant Professor Department of History ANU Campus, Ongole Abstract Irrigation systems are also used for dust suppression, disposal of sewage, and in mining. Irrigation is often studied together with drainage, which is the natural or artificial removal of surface and subsurface water from the areas. Prakasam district is the agricultural backward area in southern coastal Andhra region of Andhra Pradesh state. The district lies between 15, 30’ and 16 north latitudes, and between 79 and 80 east longitudes. It is bounded on the north by Guntur and Mahabubnagar districts, on the south by Kadapah and Nellore districts, on the east by the Bay of Bengal and on the west by Kurnool district. The main objectives of the study are examined the irrigation facilities, and suggestions. The data collected for secondary data. Introduction Irrigation was one of the major items of work in which the entire society was essentially interested. Irrigation has been leading input for the spread of green revolution in the state. For it was through irrigation that agricultural could progress. It was considered a magnificent and holy action on the part of individuals, administrators to construct, canals, tanks and dig wells, all these for the encouragement of agriculture. Irrigation is the effort to overcome the rainfall fluctuation or deficiency by means of conservation and optimum uses of ground water, www.ijmer.in
90
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
surface water facilities so as to stabilize agricultural economy and to increase agricultural productivity without completely depending upon the vegetation of rainfall. In the district are well irrigated facilities, the Krishna, and the Gunglakamma River, Nagarjunasagar canal, and also low level canals. Study area The district of Ongole was formed on February 2, 1970. The area of Ongole district, before it came into existence as a district on 2nd February 1970, had parts of Nellore, Kurnool, Guntur districts of Andhra Pradesh. It was renamed as Prakasm district in 1972 in memory of the eminent freedom fighter, later Chief Minister of Andhra state, Tanguturi Prakasam Pantulu, who was born at Vinodarayanipalem a hamlet of Kanuparthi village of this district. The district lies between 15, 30’ and 16 north latitudes, and between 79 and 80 east longitudes. It is bounded on the north by Guntur and Mahabubnagar districts, on the south by Kadapah and Nellore districts, on the east by the Bay of Bengal and on the west by Kurnool district. Among the coastal districts of Andhra Pradesh the district is the largest in geographical area. It occupies the fourth place in the state with an extent of 17,626 square kilometers which account for 6.41 percent of the total area of the state. Over all, it has 56 Revenue Mandals with 1081 villages and 11 towns. Prakasam district is drained by the Gundlakamma and Maneru, Musi and Paleru rivers Objectives 1. To examine the different types of irrigation facilities in the study area. 2. To study benefits of irrigation facilities and suggestions.
www.ijmer.in
91
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Methodology The present research work has been carried by based on secondary data. The data had calculated for the spatial irrigation facility at mandal level from Prakasam district of Andhra Pradesh. The data has been collected mainly from the hand book of Statistics, Chief Planning Office, and Prakasam for the year 2010-11. Analysis The chief sources of irrigation in the district are canals, tanks and wells including tube wells. These irrigated a gross area of 2,61892 hectares, and the net area irrigated 96,289 hectares of the total area irrigated (36.8%) of the area by canals, 24154 hectors (9.2%) by tanks, and1,26,101 hectors (48.2%) by Ground water. The increase in the area irrigated is mainly due to canal irrigation Classification of Irrigation works: The dominance of canal irrigation is the main source in the Prakasam district. It is due to The Kommanuru canal from Prakasam Barrage, The distributaries channels under the Nagarjuna Sagar Project right canal. The Tippayapalem project, The Mopadu project, The Rallapadu project, The Pandurangadi reservoir, The Paleru Bitragunta scheme and The Upputuru Anicut. The irrigation is divided into two in this district i.e. 1.Major medium irrigation 2.Minor irrigation. Kommanuru canal: The Kommanuru canal of the Krishna western delta system benefits of Chirala and Addanki and irrigated an extent of 29,654 ha. (73,277acres). Nagarjuna Sagar Right canal: This canal is called Jawahar Canal after the late Prime Minister Pandit Jawaharlal Nehru. It takes off on the right side of the Nagarjuna Sagar Dam and runs for 203 km. of which 66 k. are in Prakasam district. The total localized ayacut under the Nagarjuna www.ijmer.in
92
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Sagar Right canal in this district is 1, 81,032 hectares. The area irrigated rose from 68,057 hectares in 1984-85 to 1, 18,546 hectares in 1991-92. Tippayapalem Project: The Tippayapalem project across the Rallavagu near Tippayapalem village in Markapur mandal was constructed between 1925 and 1937 which beached at two places as a result of heavy rains but which was restored with a mansoonary dam by 1941.The project benefits an ayacut of 477.12 ha (1,179 acres). Mopadu Project: The Mopadu project across the river Manneru near Mopadu in the former Kanigiri taluk was sanctioned in 1912 but completed in 1921 at a cost Rs.22.90 lakha to develop an ayacut of 5,058.57 (12,500 acres). Rallapadu project: The Rallapdu Project across the Manneru in the former Kandukur taluk was constructed in two stages. The project ensures assured water-supply to the old ayacut of
2,249.24
he
(5,558
acres).Panduvagandi
Reservoir:
The
Pondavagundi Reservoir was constructed in 1956 at an estimated cost of over five lakh of rupees to irrigate 456.48 ha (1,128 acres). Paleru-Bitragunta
Scheme:
An
estimated
cost
of
Rs.55.88 lakhs in 1962-64 across the Paleru near Jillellamudi in Kandukuru Mandal and a supply channel was excavated over a length of 20.92 km., to feed the Bitragunta tank (618.76 ha.) Chavati tank (165.11 ha) Pakala new tank (752.50 ha) Konrajugunta tank (107.24 ha) and Binginipalle tank (437.87ha) with total aycut of 2,322.89 ha (5,740acres). Lower Upputeru Anicut: The Lower Upputeru Anicut across the Upputeru at Peddapavani (Lingasamudram Mandal) was constructed in 1956 an estimated cost of Rs.10.74 lakhs to stabilize the then existing ayacut of 792.42 ha. and feed six tanks. Rivers: Nearly all the rivers in the district flow from west to east. Important rivers flowing in this region are the Krishna, the Gundalakamma, the Rallapadu and the Tigaleru and the Paleru , www.ijmer.in
93
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Hannery and the Musi. The Krishna River is one of the greatest rivers flowing across in the peninsular India. North of Yerrakondapalem Nallamala range steeply raises and attains an attitude about 300 feet near the Sikharam the highest peak on the way to the holy place Srisailam. The river cuts through the range and the resultant gorge with steeply precipitous is magnificent sight. The hills and Krishna River play a dominant role on the activities of prehistoric man. The Gundlakamma is a seasonal river that flows through the east central part of the state of Andhra Pradesh, India. It rises at an attitude 2,954 near Gundlabrahmeshwaram village in the Nallamala hills in Nandyal taluk of Kurnool district. It receives the waters of a number of tributary streams from both sides of which the Chitamaleru and Dornapuvagu on the left bank are important. The Tigaleru is one of important tributary of Gudlakamma. It then flows east and finally falls into the Bay of Bengal near Devarampadu in Ongole Mandals. The total length of the river is about 265 kilometers. Tigaleru in Nallamala flows in south west direction to empty the Gundlakamma near Dupadu. It is mostly seasonal and dries up in summer seasons. Rallavagu, it is tributary stream and flows only a shorter distance before meeting Tigaleru River. It is dry most of the year and gets flooded only when the rain falls on the Nallamala hills. But the rivers surprisingly carried a vast load of pebbles and Cobbles. The river Manneru rises in the Veligondas in the erstwhile Kanigiri taluk, flows through Nellore district and takes a turn into the Lingasamudram mandal at penetrable of this district. The river Musi rises near Dokkalasala in the Veligondas. The river Musi is so called because it is a treacherous or dangerous river with unpredictable freshens in the months of September, October and November. This river flows first east and then southe through the Markapur, Darsi, Konakanamitla, northern border of Podili, Chimakurthi, Kondapi, Tangutur and
www.ijmer.in
94
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Kothapatnam Mandals of the district for nearly a distance of 112 km. falls into the Bay of Bengal near Madanur in Kothapatnam Mandal. The river Paleru rises in the Veligondas and flows through the Veligandla, Kanigiri, P.C. Palle, Ponnaluru, Kandukur, Zarugumalli, Singarayakonda and Tangutur Mandals of the district for a distance of 112Km. and falls into the Bay of Bengal at Pakala of Singurayakonda mandal . The water of this river is utilized principally for the Pandavagandi project and Paleru Bitragunta scheme. Ramatheertham balancing reservoir: The prestigious project of the Andhra Pradesh Government is Jalayagnam. The aim of the program is to save the farmers from the vagaries of monsoons and provide assured irrigation facility to every acre of land in the Sate and transforming it as Harithandhrapradesh. Tanks The total number of irrigation tanks in the district in 1987 was 809 of them. There are 175 tanks; each common dug an ayacut of over 81 hectares (200 acres) in the district. Most of the tanks lie in the upland of the taluks of Markapur, Giddalur, Kandukur, Kanigiri, Podili and Darsi. The tanks which command 404.68 hectares (1000 acres) of ayacut in the district are the 1.Cumbum tank having ayacut of 48.96ha. (12,099 acres) 2. Markapur tank with 817.46ha. (2.020 acres) 3. Pitigayakulla tank with 755.15ha. (18668 acres) 4. Karedu tank with 630.90ha. (1,559 acres) 5. Thuvapadu tank with 607.06 ha. (1500 acres) 6. Thodaluru tank with 437.06ha.(1080acres) 7.Chevuru tank with 436.25ha (1,078acres) 8.Chapayachakraya tank at Allur with 408.73 ha (1010acres) Cumbum Tank: Cumbum tank was constructed by Gopanna Odaya, Governor of Cumbum, and another view was that it was constricted 400 years ago by one Varadarajamma alias Annapurnamma. It is one of the biggest tanks with a water-spread area of 23.9 sq.km. www.ijmer.in
95
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
providing irrigation to about 4,896.29 ha. (12,099 acres). Markapur Tank: The markapur tank situated on the South-east of Markapur town was constructed by Teluguraydu, a subordinate of the Gajapatis of Orissa, on the occasion of his pilgrimage to Srisailam. It receives water from the Gundlakamma basin with a capacity of 218 m.cft. The length of the bound is 1,091.18 meters and width at the top of the bund range from 1.83 meters to 5. 48 meters. Irrigated are is 1,250 ha (3,089 acres). Gundlakamma : Apart from the ancient dam at Cumbum mentioned above a modern dam called Gundlakamma Reservoir Project too has been constructed across the river at Chinna Mallapuram, Prakashan district. Some 80 feet (24mts) high, this dam has capacity of 3, 800,000,000 cubic feet and can irrigate 80,600 acres of land. It will also provide drinking water for the 2, 50,000 people living in Ongole and its surrounding hamlets. The lower part of the river Basin is irrigated Krishna River water through Nagarjuna Sagar right bank canal. Veligonda: Veligonda Project is under construction to connect the river basin with the adjacent Krishna River Basin by a 20Km long Tunnel from the Srisailam reservoir. Construction of a 40 tmcft capacity storage reservoir is also part of this project. Once this project is completed, the reliability of water supply to all the irrigation projects in the river basin would enhance vastly. Ground water: The Ground water in the state was established in March, 1971 to investigate the ground water resources for their exploitation. A beach of it was established in Ongole to carryout Hydro geological and geophysical surveys and systematic ground water surveys covering area of 80078 sq.km and examined 20.719 sites to evaluate the ground water resources so that wells can dug and pumpsets install of the estimated ground water potential of 1.91 lakh hectare meters, 0.99 lakh meters www.ijmer.in
96
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
are at present taped by dug wells, tube wells and filter points constituting 72% of utilization. Drains In order to save the lands and other properties from the damages caused by the floods and cyclones drainage works have seen constructed. There are 19 major drains, 13 medium, 82 minor and 24 revenue drains in the district. Conclusion: Without agriculture, man can’t survive and without irrigation facility agriculture could not there. Before irrigation, man survived by eating fruits and vegetables from the forest and drinking water from natural streams. Food is essential for human beings and animals for their surveillance and at the same time water also need. In this juncture the man started to use water from ponds, streams, tanks, channels and rivers for agriculture purpose. Irrigation is the artificial uses of water to the field’s .Irrigation system are also used for dust suppression, disposal of sewage, and in mining. Irrigation is often studied together with drainage, which is the natural or artificial removal of surface and sub-surface water the areas. The Prakasam district of irrigation is high in reservoir and canal irrigation. Suggestions: 1. Development of irrigation facilities is essential for expansion of agriculture 2. Created awareness to the formers for proper utilization and maintenance of water resources. References: 1. Government District Gazetteer, Prakasam, A.P. Government, Hyderabad 2011, www.ijmer.in
97
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
2. Veeraputhiran, R. Drip Irrigation for Sustainable Water Management, Kissan World, Jan.2005. 3. Sanjayakumar, Development of Irrigation in India, kurukshetra. Dec. 2007. 4. Handbook of statistics Prakasam district, 2010-11, Compiled and published by, Chief Planning Office,Prakasam district, Ongole 5. Google Earth 6. https://www.hindu.com 2007/02/05/stories12007020513940400.htm 7. http:www.hinduonnet.com/2001/10/20/stories/0420201t.htm 8. Dr.A.V.Raman Rao, Economic Development of Andhra Pradesh 17661957
www.ijmer.in
98
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
SELF-EFFICACY AND CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT Dr. Ravindranath K. Murthy Department of Education Osmania University, Hyderabad Abstract The present research study attempts to investigate the relationship between self-efficacy and classroom management of teachers. Using a survey research design methodology, the primary data for the study was generated. Data analysis revealed that there exist a significant positive relation between self efficacy and classroom management. The meaning of this result and implications of this finding are discussed in this study. Key
words:
Self-efficacy,
Classroom
Management,
Behavioural
Instructional Management. Academic Achievement Introduction The primary duty of a teacher is to teach effectively in the classroom. When teachers enter the classroom fully prepared to teach satisfactorily, they face students coming from a wide variety of backgrounds and skills. They face students with a wide range of learning abilities, as well as a varied range of learning disabilities. Students come to the classroom from stable, traditional, supportive home environments and also from unstable, broken and homeless and disturbed families. Students also come to the class room with different attitudes towards learning. Some students are ready to learn, while others are not, with such dynamics prevailing in the classroom teachers enter the classroom to teach. Teachers have to take care of all these children coming from different backgrounds, mindsets and make an attempt to realise the objectives of teaching. Thus management of the classroom for effective delivery of instructions and or for effective delivery of instruction managing the classroom becomes an important www.ijmer.in
99
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
issue for the teachers. Classroom management is one of the important primary pre requisite in the teaching learning environment. It is an important issue in the school setting. Research has identified it as an important factor for teacher performance and also a primary source of teacher related stress and burnout and an important factor for student learning (Yilmaz & Cavas, 2008; Emmer & Hickman, 1991 Research on classroom management has been done on varied and different perspectives. However much of the research on classroom management that is found and available in the literature has been restricted to North American and European samples. Structured empirical Research on classroom management done on Indian samples is still in its infancy. Classroom management permeate teaching learning process in the classroom. Classroom management is a broad umbrella term describing a teacher’s efforts to oversee classroom activities such as learning, social interaction and student behavior (Martin and Baldwin 1998). Classroom management has been defined in the literature, McCreary (2010) defined classroom management as “the methods and strategies an educator uses to maintain a classroom environment that is conducive to student success and learning” (p. 1). According to Marzano (2003), “well-managed classrooms provide an environment in which teaching and learning can flourish” (p. 1) Martin and Sass (1998) defined classroom management as that which encompasses “teacher efforts to oversee the activities of the classroom including student behavior, student interactions and learning” (p. 1124). Teacher's perceived ability in managing the classroom is a major factor that may determine to what extent the teacher will be successful in managing the classroom. This perceived ability of the teacher is more popularly studies as self-efficacy in the literature. Self-efficacy beliefs of the teacher would play a significant role in managing the classroom.
www.ijmer.in
100
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Research shows that self-efficacy beliefs are strong predictors of teacher behaviour (Hoy, 2004). If a teacher believes that he or she is capable of managing his or her classroom and be able to teach meaningfully, then the teacher will be able to teach and manage the classroom.(Ritchie, 2006). The concept of Self-efficacy has generated a growing body of literature in education since the publication of Bandura’s seminal article ‘Self-efficacy: toward a unifying theory of behavior change’ in 1977. Self-efficacy is defined as teachers’ belief in their ability to organise and execute courses of action necessary to bring about desired results (Tschannen-Moran et al., 1998). It reflects about what teachers will be able to do in a particular situation, not what they already accomplished, or why they accomplished it in the past (Hoy, 2004). To what extent self efficacy of the teacher will contribute to classroom management is the purpose of the present investigation. Self-Efficacy Self-efficacy basically refers to the perceived ability or capability for performing a specific task. Wood and Bandura (1989) defined selfefficacy “as beliefs’ in one’s capabilities to mobilize the motivation, cognitive resources, and courses of action needed to meet given situational demands” (p. 408). In studying self efficacy, the perceived ability of the individual is emphasized rather than the actual ability or possessed ability of the teacher in executing a task. Teachers with strong self-efficacy beliefs are capable of positively influencing student performance. They choose challenging activities and try harder when confronted with obstacles such as student ability or a student’s home environment. They are not easily distracted and take pride in their accomplishments when their work is completed (Ashton & Webb, 1986). They tend to believe that all students can learn if appropriate conditions for learning can be provided (Tschannen-Moran & Hoy, 2001).
www.ijmer.in
101
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Research suggests that teachers’ classroom management skills, are influenced by their own perceptions of their teaching competence (Gibson & Dembo, 1984). Teachers who tend to be preoccupied with their own inadequacies may doubt their own ability and will begin to worry about their personal incompetence and inadequacies resulting in poor teaching effectiveness (Ashton & Webb, 1986). Teachers with high sense of self efficacy have several work outcomes to their credit. Research has documented that teachers with high sense of self efficacy is associated with student achievement (Anthony & Kritsonis, 2007), student motivation (Nolen et al., 2007), classroom management behaviour (Giallo&Little, 2003), responsibility for student learning (Darling-Hammond et al., 2002), trust and openness (Goddard et al., 2004) and job satisfaction (Carara et al., 2006). Teachers’ self-efficacy is also related to classroom organisation and management (Gibson & Dembo, 1984). Research has documented that teachers with high self efficacy beliefs follow humanistic classroom management practices in schools resulting in increased student autonomy (Woolfolk & Hoy, 1990). Teachers’ selfefficacy may contribute to promote students’ sense of efficacy (Sewell & St-George, 2000; Usher & Pajares, 2006), fostering their involvement in class activities and their efforts in facing difficulties (Ross, 1998).When teachers are highly efficacious, their students are found to have a high level of academic achievement, autonomy and motivation, and a firm belief in their own efficacy (Cheung, 2008). The relationship between teachers’ classroom management and generalised self-efficacy beliefs are investigated in the present study. Method Research Design The present research study is designed on a quantitative research framework which utilized a descriptive research perspective. No www.ijmer.in
102
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
variable were manipulated in this study, and is a non experimental research study in nature. This study adopted a descriptive survey research methodology in which instruments-questionnaires were used to collect primary data from the school teachers working in different schools. Sample A cross sectional study was used in the present study. The sample for the present study comprised of 220 secondary schools teachers selected from different schools. Their age range was from 29 to 51 years. Measures General Self-Efficacy Scale: General self-efficacy scale developed by Chen, Gully, and Eden (2001) was used in the present study. This scale has 8 items having a five point Likert-type response format ranging from strongly disagree (1) to strongly agree (5). Chen, Gully and Eden (2002 developed this scale after finding inadequacies in the existing scales to measure generalized self-efficacy (eg. Sherer, Maddux, Mercandante, Prentice-Dunn, Jacobs, & Rogers, 1982). They have established that this scale has higher reliability and construct validity. High scores on this scale indicate higher generalized self-efficacy. Cronbach's alpha of this scale in the present study was found to be 0.77 Classroom Management: To measure classroom management of the teachers, the Behaviour and Instructional management scale developed by Martin and Sass (1998) was used in the present study. Martin and Sass (1998) conceptualised classroom management in terms of behavioural management and instructional management. This scale comprises of 24 items, twelve items in the scale measure behavioural management and the other twelve items measure instructional management. Some of the items in the scale are positively worded and some items negatively worded. This scale has six point Likert type response format ranging from “strongly agree” to “strongly disagree”. www.ijmer.in
103
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Summative scores in this scale vary from 24 to 144. High scores on this scale indicate better classroom management and low score indicate poor classroom management. Cronbach's alpha of this scale in the present study was found to be 0.79. For statistical analysis of the data the total score on this scale was taken into consideration. Procedure The two questionnaires along with the covering letter were distributed to the sampled teachers, after establishing initial rapport with them. Teachers were briefly explained about the purpose of the study and were told how to respond to the items in the scale. They were encouraged to give frank and honest responses to the items in both the questionnaires. Results and Discussion To examine the relationship between self-efficacy and classroom management, the product moment correlation coefficient is computed and presented in table 1. Table 1 Correlation Coefficients between Self-efficacy and Classroom Management Variable
Correlation Coefficient
Self-Efficacy 0.685** Classroom Management **p<0.001 From table 1 it can be observed that the correlation coefficient computed between self-efficacy and classroom management is positive and found to be significant (p<0.001). This indicates that there is www.ijmer.in
104
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
significant positive relationship between self-efficacy and classroom management. The significant and positive correlation found between self-efficacy and classroom management indicates that self-efficacy of teachers influences their classroom management. Conclusion The results of the present study suggest that self-efficacy is a significantly correlated with classroom management This suggests the importance of self-efficacy in effectively managing the classroom. Review of literature suggests that self efficacy beliefs of the teachers play an important role in classroom management skills of the teachers. This suggests the need for Self-efficacy training of teachers. Basic training in self-efficacy would enable teachers to develop their psychological capacities and would result in better classroom management abilities resulting in school effectiveness. Luthans and his team have found that Self-efficacy can be developed in employees with a two to three hour intervention (Luthans, Youssef & Avolio, 2007). Recruitment agencies of the teachers may also assess the selfefficacy of t eachers and may include it as selection strategy of teachers during the selection process of the teachers. Further studies may be carried out by conducting an intervention, to enhance the self-efficacy of teachers. Longitudinal studies may also be carried out to examine how self-efficacy would have an influence on classroom management of teachers over a period of time. References 1.
Anthony, T. & Kritsonis, W. (2007) ‘A mixed methods assessment of the effectiveness of strategic e-mentoring in improving the selfefficacy and persistence (or retention) of alternatively certified novice teachers within an inner city school’. District Doctoral
www.ijmer.in
105
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Forum National Journal for Publishing and Monitoring Doctoral Student Research, 4(1), 1–8. 2. Ashton, T. & Webb, B. (1986) Making a Difference: Teachers’ Sense of Efficacy and Student Achievement. White Plains, NY: Longman 3. Carara, G., Barbaranelli, C., Steca, P. & Malone, P. (2006) ‘Teachers’ self-efficacy beliefs as determinants of job satisfaction and students’ academic achievement: a study at the school level. Journal of School Psychology, 44 (1), 473-490 4. Chambers, S., Sharon, M., Henson, R. & Sienty, S. (2001) Classroom Orientation in Beginning Teachers. Paper presented at the annual meeting of the Southwest Educational Research Association, New Orleans. 5. Chen, G., Gully, S. M., & Eden, D. (2001) Validation of a New General Self-Efficacy Scale. Organizational Research Methods, 4, (1), 62-83. 6. Cheung, H. (2008) ‘Teacher efficacy: a comparative study of Hong Kong and Shanghai primary in-service teachers’. Australian Educational Researcher, 35(1), 103–23 7. Cizek, G. C. (1999) Handbook of Educational Policy. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. 8. Darling-Hammond, L., Chung, R. & Frelow, F. (2002) ‘Variation in teacher preparation: how well do different pathways prepare teachers to teach?’ Journal of Teacher Education, 53(4), 286–302. 9. Edwards, C. H. (2003) Classroom Discipline and Management, 4th edn. Columbus, OH: Merrill. 10. Emmer, E. T. & Hickman, J. (1991) ‘Teacher efficacy in classroom management and discipline’. Educational and Psychological Measurement, 51(3), 755–66. www.ijmer.in
106
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
11. Giallo, R. & Little, E. (2003) ‘Classroom behavior problems: the relationship between preparedness, classroom experiences, and selfefficacy in graduate and student teachers’. Australian Journal of Educational & Developmental Psychology, 3, 21–34. 12. Gibson, S. & Dembo, H. (1984) ‘Teacher efficacy: a construct validation’. Journal of Educational Psychology, 76(4), 569–82. 13. Goddard, R., Hoy, W. & Woolfolk, A. (2004) ‘Collective efficacy beliefs: theoretical developments, empirical evidence, and future directions’. Researcher, 3(33), 3–13. 14. Hoy, A. (2004) What Do Teachers Need to Know About SelfEfficacy? Paper presented at the annual meeting of the American Educational Research Association, San Diego. 15. Luthans, F., Youssef, C. M., & Avolio, B. J. (2007). Psychological Capital, Oxford, United Kingdom: Oxford University Press. 16. Martin, K., Yin, Z. & Baldwin, B. (1998) ‘Construct validation of the attitudes and beliefs classroom control inventory’. Journal of Classroom Interaction, 33(2), 6–15. 17. Martin, N. & Baldwin, B. (2004) Belief Regarding Classroom Management Style: Differences Between Novice and Experienced Teachers, ERIC Document Reproduction Service No.ED 387471. 18. Martin, N. K. & Sass, D. (2010). Construct Validation of the Behavior and Instructional Management Scale. Teaching and Teacher Education. 26(5), 1124-1135 19. McCreary, R. (2010). Classroom Management definition. eHow, Retrieved on October 10, 2016 from http://www.ehow.com 20. Nolen, S.,Ward, C., Horn, I., Campbel, S.,Mahna, K. & Childers, S. (2007) Motivation to Learn During Student Teaching. Paper
www.ijmer.in
107
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
presented at the annual meeting of the American Educational Research Association, Chicago 21. Ritchie, K. (2006) ‘A Comparison of the Self-Efficacy Scores of Preservice Teachers Based on Initial College Experience’. Unpublished doctoral dissertation, University of North Texas. 22. Stajkovic, A. D., & Luthans, F. (1998). Self-efficacy and workrelated performance: A meta-analysis. Psychological Bulletin, 124, 240-261. 23. Tschannen-Moran, M. & Hoy, A. (2001) ‘Teacher efficacy: capturing an elusive construct’. Teaching and Teacher Education, 17, 783– 805. 24. Tschannen-Moran, M., Woolfolk-Hoy, A. & Hoy, K. (1998) ‘Teacher efficacy: its meaning and measure’. Review of Educational Research, 68, 202–48. 25. Usher, E. & Pajares, F. (2006) ‘Inviting confidence in school: invitations as a critical source of the academic self-efficacy beliefs of entering middle school students’. Emory University Journal of Invitational Theory and Practice, 12, 7–16. 26. Woolfolk, A. & Hoy, W. (1990) ‘Prospective teachers’ sense of efficacy and beliefs about control’. Journal of Educational Psychology, 82, 81–91. 27. Yilmaz, H. & Cavas, P. (2008) ‘The effect of the teaching practice on pre-service elementary teachers’ science teaching efficacy and classroom management beliefs’. Eurasia Journal of Mathematics, Science & Technology Education, 4(1), 45–54.
www.ijmer.in
108
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
THE FATE OF THE UNIVERSE IN THE QURANIC PERSPECTIVE Dr. Abul Hassan Chaudhury Assistant Registrar Assam University, Silchar
Abstract: The Quran is a book of knowledge as is reflected in many of its revelations. So, it is obvious that inter-alia the Quran may have indications on the Cosmological ideas like fate of the universe. Thus, this paper intends to make a study on the indications of the Quran which is supposed to indicate a theory on the concept of ultimate fate of the universe that may have relevance to the modern scientific ideas. Interestingly, after a systematic study, it is found that the concept indicated about the fate of the universe in the Quran is almost in conformity with latest scientific ideas on the subject. Key words: The Quran, Fate of the universe, Big Crunch 1. Introduction: The Qur’an is a very important source of knowledge for the science of Astronomy, though it was revealed about 1000 years before the invention of telescope and consequent upon the starting of modern science. There are lots of revelations in the Qur’an, which indicates on the different aspects of celestial bodies. The Qur’an in its different revelations refers on the earth, the sun, the moon, planets, stars, solar system, galaxy etc. It also refers about the characters of the heavenly bodies such as their creation, motion, brightness, gravitation, and even ultimate fate. With a view to inviting humankind to reflect upon the credibility of Allah, the Almighty, the Creator of the universe, it gives various indications having wide coverage on the creation, structure, evolution and fate of the universe. The scientific indications on the various aspects of the different branches of Astronomy specially Cosmology are available in the Qur’an, though the scientific knowledge www.ijmer.in
109
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
of the Modern age is far advanced which is beyond the imagination of the people of seventh century. However, to study the scientific indications of the Qur’an, we have to keep in mind that the Qur’an is not a book of Science or a treatise on Astronomy. Off course, there are many revelations in the Qur’an which seems to be miraculous in nature, being revealed in seventh century through a letterless man Hazrat Muhammad ( Pbuh), the great prophet of Islam. The Qurán claims itself to be a book of knowledge. It clearly mentions that as like creation of the universe a time will come when everything will be destroyed. After that there will be resurrection of all living being. However, the Qur’an has not mentioned any specific time regarding the collapse of the universe. The following verse of the Qur’an in English translation may be considered. All that is on the earth will perish. (55:26)1 There are more verses which may also be considered in English translation: And call not, besides Allah, on another God. There is no god but He. Everything (that exists) will perish except his Face. To Him belongs the Command and to Him will ye (all) be brought back. (28:88)2 We created not the heavens and the earth and all that is between them save with truth, and for a term appointed: but those who disbelieve turn away from that whereof they are warned. (46:03)3 One more verse in English translation may be noted . Do they not reflect in their own minds? Not but in truth and for a term appointed, did Allah create the heavens and the earth, and all between them: yet are there truly many among men who deny the meetings with their Lord (at the Resurrection)! (30:08)4
www.ijmer.in
110
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
From the verses, it is clear that the as universe was created by Allah and it will come to end inevitably. Only the hour for the end of the universe is not indicated in the Qur’an and its knowledge lies with the creator, Allah . So, any theory like steady state theory of the universe is not acceptable to the Qur’an. 2. Objective of the Study: Since the Quran is a book of knowledge, it is of paramount importance that it may have indications on the fate of the universe as is claimed to be created by Allah, the Creator Supreme and in the present day of scientific development it has great relevance in the study of Astronomy including Cosmology. So the objective of this paper is to make a cursory search of all the relevant revelations in the Quran and interpret the same after proper analysis to compile the findings for comparison with the modern scientific knowledge regarding fate of the universe. 3. Methodology and Study of Literature: To make the study systematically, the different revelations of the Quran having some indications on the fate of the universe have been brought under consideration. There are many revelations in the Qur’an which indicate about the fate of the universe. However, there is no continuous description available there about the same in any particular chapter, rather there are passages scattered in various chapters which indicates about various aspects of the ultimate fate of the universe. To get a clear idea on the concept of fate of the universe indicated by the Qur’an at first the relevant revelations from the Qur’an are required to be brought together in some systematic order. There after analysis and interpretation is done to make a comparative study with modern science 4. Big Crunch as Indicated in the Quran There is a scientific concept that a time may come when due to gravitational force the expansion of the universe may be stopped and www.ijmer.in
111
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
there may be a big crunch. All the compositions of the cosmos that are held by gravitational attraction and rotational motion will be moved backward to collapse. Gravitation counter acts the centrifugal force of rotational or orbital motion, which keeps the two forces in equilibrium.5 Therefore, till the repulsive force remains stronger, the universe will continue to expand. As such there is every collapse of star when the average mass becomes lesser than the critical value; the gravitational force overcomes the repulsive force and the star collapse to convert into a black hole.6 Likewise, a big crunch for the whole universe is inevitable as per the Qur’an. In chapter 21, verse No.104, the Qur’an proclaims (English translation): The Day that we roll up the heavens like a scroll rolled up for books (completed)- even as We produced the first Creation, so shall We produce a new one: a promise We have undertaken: truly shall We fulfill it. ( 21:104)7 There is another revelation for consideration: No just estimate have they made of Allah, such as is due to Him: on the Day of judgement the whole of the earth will be but His handful, and the heavens will be rolled up in His right-hand: glory to Him! High is He above the Partners they attribute to Him! ( 39:67)8 Here the Qur’an has mentioned a parable to let the man to understand how there will be a big crunch. Everything will go in reverse direction of earlier expansion to have big crunch which is compared with rolling up a scroll to indicate contraction. There will be roll up of the universe or gravitational collapse into the state of singularity from where Big Bang was held earlier. When this will occur no physical law will remain prevalent since the Big crunch bring the end of all.9 We know from Big Bang theory and also from expanding universe theory that after Big Bang there is continuous and endless expansion of the universe created in the Big Bang. In this connection, it may be www.ijmer.in
112
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
noted that in 1931 George Lamaitre pointed out that if the outward movement of all galaxies were happened to be stopped and taken towards the backward direction, then they would be presumably meet at a single point of zero volume due to the catastrophic gravitational collapse10. As such it is reasonable to consider that the primeval atom or cosmic egg must have concentrated all that is now we get as universe. If the average density of the universe is less than the critical value, it will continue its expansion and not re-collapse.11 Moreover, if the gravitational attraction between the different galaxies happens the expansion to be slows down and ultimately stops, the galaxies then will be started to move towards each other and there will be contraction of the universe leading a Big Crunch.12 This reflects to the idea of a closed universe. Stephen Hawking in his famous book ‘A brief History of Time’ has remarked: The universe would expand to a very large size and eventually it would collapse again into what looks like a singularity in real time. Thus in a sense, we are still all doomed, even if we keep away from black holes. (P148) 4.1. Universe will be collapsed with a single Blast The Qur’an has categorically mentioned that the universe will come to an end with a very large single burst and everything will be destroyed or destabilized. In the chapter 36, verse No.53, the Qur’an proclaimed ( English translation): And the day that the Trumpet will be sounded- then will be smitten with terror those who are in the heavens and those who are on earth, except such as Allah will please ( to exempt) and all shall come to Him in utter humility.( 27: 87)13 There are more revelation in English translation may be considered:
www.ijmer.in
113
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
It will be no more than a single Blast, when lo! They will all be brought up before Us! (36:53)14 And unto Allah belongeth the unseen of the heavens and the earth and the matter of the Hour ( of Doom) is but as a twinkling of the eye or it is nearer still. Lo! Allah is able to do all things (16:77)15 The trumpet shall be sounded, when behold! from the sepulchers (men) will rush forth to their Lord! (36:51)16 And Our Command is but a single Word- like the twinkling of an eye. (54:50)17 Then it will be a single (compelling) cry; and behold, they will begin to see! (37:19)18 Then when one blast is sounded on the Trumpet (69:13)19 Then when the Trumpet is blown, there will be no more relationships between them that day, nor will one asks after another! (23:101)20 The Day when they will hear a (mighty) Blast in (very) truth: that will be the Day of Resurrection. (50:42)21 Then watch thou for the Day that the sky will bring forth a kind of smoke ( or mist) plainly visible. (44:10)22 The above verses indicate about the events to happen, may be millions of years ahead or at any moment in future.23 It is pertinent to note that the time required for destruction of the universe will be very small to the living being on the earth. Perhaps the Qur’an has only pointed out the very short time required for destruction of the earth where man lives.
www.ijmer.in
114
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
4.2. Mountains will be uprooted and scattered With the huge blast the mountains on the earth will be uprooted and will be scattered like clouds pass away. The Qur’an proclaims ( English translation): They ask thee concerning the Mountains: say,” My Lord will uproot them and scattered them as dust.( 20:105)24 There are more verses in the Qur’an in this respect. May be considered in English translation: And the mountains shall be crumbled to atoms, becoming dust scattered abroad (56:05-06)25 Thou seest the mountains and thinkest them firmly fixed: but they shall pass away as the clouds pass away (such is) the artistry of Allah who disposes of all things in perfect order for He is well acquainted with all that ye do ( 27:88)26 There are more verses may be considered in English translation: And the mountains shall vanish as if they were a mirage ( 78:20)27 And the mountains will be like carded wool ( 101:05)28 When the mountains are scattered ( to the winds) as dust ( 77:10)29 When the mountains vanish (like a mirage) (81:03) 30 The above revelations of the Quran describe almost vividly the fate of the hills on the dooms day. It states that the mountains will be crashed and hill be destroyed to convert to powdered form and passed away like clouds. 4.3. Everything in the universe will be changed When the universe will collapse, everything will be changed and to different shapes. The Qur’an proclaims (English translation):
www.ijmer.in
115
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
One day the earth will be changed to a different earth, and so will be the heavens and (men) will be marshalled forth, before Allah, the One, the irresistible.( 14:48)31 The above verse indicates that after destruction, the new situation of the heavens and the earth will be different that of the present one. 4.4. The Sun and other stars will lose their light On the Doomsday the sun and other stars will lose their own light. In this regard the Qur’an proclaims (English translation): Then when the stars become dim .When the heaven is cleft asunder ( 77:08-09)32 When the sun (with its spacious light) is folded up, when the stars fall, losing their luster. (81:01-02)33 4.5. The Sun will engulf the Moon The Sun will possibly be converted to red giant before turning to a black hole and engulf the moon and the earth and even all the planets of the solar system. The matter has been indicated in the Qur’an in the following verses: At length, when the sight is dazed. (75:07)34 And the Moon is buried in darkness. (75:08)35 And the Sun and Moon are joined together,- (75:09)36 The above verses have reflected the situation of the destruction of the universe. According to recent scientific studies in the last phases of its life, the sun’s volume will increase to a very large extent to become a red giant and as a result the nearby planets and their satellites will be merged within it or we may say the sun will engulf the moon and many others.37
www.ijmer.in
116
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
4.6. There will be turmoil everywhere Form the different verses in the Qur’an, it may be assumed that there may be a collision of the earth with any celestial object planets or star and the man and other living being will heard an extremely large sound and with this everything will be destroyed and the there will be chaos in the entire universe. The following verse of the Quran suggests such situations. The Day when the sky will become as molten copper (70:08)38 When the heaven is cleft asunder (77:09)39 When the seas as blazing fire or overflow (81:06)40 As the sun will become a red giant and will increase in size, it will come very near to the earth. The result will be destruction of life on the earth and the sea waters on the earth will boil. When the Sky is cleft asunder, When the Stars are scattered, When the Oceans are suffered to burst forth. (82:01-03)41 When the sky is rent asunder ( 84:01)42 And the heavens shall be opened as if there were doors ( 78:19)43 And when the earth is flattened out ( 84:03)44 On the Day when the firmament will be in dreadful commotion ( 52:09)45 When the earth shall be shaken to its depths ( 56:04)46 And the sky will be rent asunder, for it will that Day be flimsy.( 69:16)47 From the above verses it is observed that the Qur’an has described many situations of the Doomsday. Particularly, it reflects vividly that the main features of the earth as well as other heavenly bodies will be destroyed and the happenings will be like the stages of slow motion picture which will be occurred due to gravitational collapse of the universe. The water in the oceans will be boiled and evaporated. As all www.ijmer.in
117
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
the fundamental forces of nature will lose their respective property and the entire universe will be rolled up to a point of singularity as was at the time of the origin.48 Since because, during Big Crunch time which always moves in future direction will be reversed and will move in backward direction, there is every possibility of repetition of happenings earlier times, even resurrection of man and appearance early stages of the universe including earth. 5. Rebirth of the Universe After Big Crunch there may be another Big Bang and as such there is possibility of rebirth of the universe including the earth. The Qur’an indicates such situation in many of its revelations. The following verse in English translation has already been mentioned: The Day that we roll up the heavens like a scroll rolled up for books (completed) - even as We produced the first Creation, so shall We produce a new one: a promise We have undertaken: truly shall We fulfill it. (21:104)49 There are such other revelations in English translation may be considered: Or who originates Creation, then repeats it, and who gives you sustenance from heavens and earth? ( can there be another) God besides Allah? Say, “ Bring forth your argument, if ye are telling the truth! ( 27:64)50 To Him will be your return – of all of you. The promise of Allah is true and sure. It is He who beginneth the process of creation and repeateth it, that He may reward with justice……… (10:04)51 See they not that Allah, Who created the heavens and the earth, has power to create the like of them (a new)? Only He has decreed a term appointed, of which there is no doubt. But the unjust refuse (to receive it) except with ingratitude.(17:99)52 www.ijmer.in
118
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
See they not how Allah originates creation, then repeats it: truly that is easy for Allah ( 29:19)53 Say “Travel through the earth and see how Allah did originate creation, so will Allah produce a later creation: for Allah has power over all things.” ( 29:20)54 Is not He Who created the heavens and the earth, able to create the like of them? ….. …(36:81)55 So it is seen that the Qur’an indicates about the recreation of the universe. As is promised by Allah in the Qur’an, after the catastrophic collapse of the physical universe and the earth, new universe and new earth will be created. The collapse and recreation is easy for Allah , the Almighty, the creator of all 56. After the big crunch, there will be again big bang. As such, the result will be as like an oscillating universe i.e endless cycle of cosmic expansion and contraction.57 6. Conclusion: The above study clearly reflects that the Quran has categorically mentioned that there will be an end of the universe through a Big Crunch. After Big Crunch, there may be another Big Bang and as such there is every possibility of rebirth of the universe. Thus, the Quranic indications on the fate of the universe are amazingly almost in conformity with the modern scientific ideas. It is felt that with the development of modern science on Cosmology, the Quranic indications will be more clearly understood. References: 1.
2. 3.
Ali Abdullah Yusuf (2008) : The Meaning of the ILLUSTRIOUS Qur’an ; Adam Publishers & Distributors, Pataudi House, Darya Ganj, New Delhi -2 Ibid Pickthal M.M (2002): The Meaning of the Glorious Qur’an, (English translation of the Qur’an),published in India UBS Publishers’ Distributors Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi
www.ijmer.in
119
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
4.
5. 6. 7.
8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
14. 15.
16.
17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24.
25. 26. 27. 28. 29.
Ali Abdullah Yusuf (2008) : The Meaning of the ILLUSTRIOUS Qur’an ; Adam Publishers & Distributors, Pataudi House, Darya Ganj, New Delhi -2 Anees-u-din Mir (1999): THE UNIVERSE seen through the QURAN; Attique Publishers, Toronto, Canada, P18 Siddiqui Moid(2004): The Quranic Cosmology, The eternal Truth; Kitab Bhavan , New Delhi, P111 Ali Abdullah Yusuf (2008) : The Meaning of the ILLUSTRIOUS Qur’an ; Adam Publishers & Distributors, Pataudi House, Darya Ganj, New Delhi -2 Ibid Khan Fateh Ullah (1999): God, Universe and Man, the Holy Quran and Hereafter; Kitab Bhavan, New Delhi,p241 Ibid, P198 Hawking Stephen (1994): Black Holes And BABY UNIVERSES and other essays, Batnam Books, p133 Hawking Stephen (1988): A Brief History of Time, Bantam Books, p147 Ali Abdullah Yusuf (2008) : The Meaning of the ILLUSTRIOUS Qur’an ; Adam Publishers & Distributors, Pataudi House, Darya Ganj, New Delhi -2 Ibid Pickthal M.M (2002): The Meaning of the Glorious Qur’an, (English translation of the Qur’an),published in India UBS Publishers’ Distributors Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi Ali Abdullah Yusuf (2008) : The Meaning of the ILLUSTRIOUS Qur’an ; Adam Publishers & Distributors, Pataudi House, Darya Ganj, New Delhi -2 Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Khan Fateh Ullah (1999): God, Universe and Man, the Holy Quran and Hereafter; Kitab Bhavan, New Delhi,p44 Ali Abdullah Yusuf (2008) : The Meaning of the ILLUSTRIOUS Qur’an ; Adam Publishers & Distributors, Pataudi House, Darya Ganj, New Delhi -2 Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid
www.ijmer.in
120
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38.
39.
40.
41.
42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49.
50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57.
Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Hawking Stephen (1994): Black Holes And BABY UNIVERSES and other essays, Batnam Books, p134 Pickthal M.M (2002): The Meaning of the Glorious Qur’an, (English translation of the Qur’an),published in India UBS Publishers’ Distributors Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi Ali Abdullah Yusuf (2008) : The Meaning of the ILLUSTRIOUS Qur’an ; Adam Publishers & Distributors, Pataudi House, Darya Ganj, New Delhi -2 Al-Hilali Muhammad Taqi-ud-din and Khan Muhammad Muhsin: The Noble Qur’an (Arabic Text, English translation with interpretations), by, Maktaba Dar-Ul-Quran Ali Abdullah Yusuf (2008) : The Meaning of the ILLUSTRIOUS Qur’an ; Adam Publishers & Distributors, Pataudi House, Darya Ganj, New Delhi -2 Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Khan Fateh Ullah (1999): God, Universe and Man, the Holy Quran and Hereafter; Kitab Bhavan, New Delhi,p44 Ali Abdullah Yusuf (2008) : The Meaning of the ILLUSTRIOUS Qur’an ; Adam Publishers & Distributors, Pataudi House, Darya Ganj, New Delhi -2 Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Ibid Khan Fateh Ullah (1999): God, Universe and Man, the Holy Quran and Hereafter; Kitab Bhavan, New Delhi,pp199-200 Ibid,p226
www.ijmer.in
121
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
FINANCIAL INCLUSION & PERFORMANCE OF RURAL BANKS IN J&K Dr.Javeed Iqbal Assistant Professor (School of Management Studies and Social Sciences) BGSBU Rajouri, Jammu and Kashmir
Mr. Firdous Ahmad Qazi Research Scholar (School of Management Studies and Social Sciences) BGSBU Rajouri,Jammu and Kashmir
Abstract Financial inclusion is the delivery of banking services to all the sections of the society in a fair, transparent and equitable manner at an affordable cost. The concept has the potential to improve the financial condition of the marginalized & disadvantaged sections of the society. Access to financial services such as loans, savings, deposits and health insurance etc. by the population living in the rural areas has been limited and has been the major deterrent of growth. The banking industry has shown a lot of growth in volume & complexity during the last few decades. Despite making improvements in financial viability, profitability and competitiveness there are concerns that banks have not been able to include vast segment of the population especially the unprivileged sections of the society into their fold of basic banking services. In this context presently an effort has been made to study the financial inclusion and performance of banks in the rural areas of J&K state. Key Words: Financial Inclusion, NABARD, Kissan Credit Card, KYC norms. Introduction Financial inclusion is the new paradigm shift to the economic growth of the country which plays an important role in driving away www.ijmer.in
122
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
the poverty. Access to finance by the poor, underprivileged and disadvantaged group on one hand is a prerequisite of poverty alleviation but on the other hand an important element for the economic growth. Majority of the rural population have no access to financial services and their only recourse is to borrow from moneylenders at the exorbitant charges causing exploitation. The main reason why the large section of the rural populationstill remains under below poverty is financial exclusion, which is proving to be a major obstacle in the path of India’s economic growth. In the struggle against poverty, the financial inclusion is a crucial element which makes the easy access to finance by the poor. The Reserve Bank of India (RBI)’s dictate (2005) obligated the Banks to adopt the national policy of financial inclusion and take initiatives and suitable measures therefore. The objective data derived from the RBI’s reports and other empirical studies unequivocally pinpoint that the main reasons of financial exclusion are lack of opportunities and access to finance, financial illiteracy, besides poor performance, apathy and negative approaches of the Banks. Therefore, financial inclusion, today, has become the national objective and major concern for the economic policy decision makers. Objectives of the Study 1. To study the progress of Financial Inclusion in the state of Jammu and Kashmir. 2. To explain the performance of various banks towards Financial Inclusion in the state. Research Methodology The study is based on the secondary data. For this study data and information has been collected with the help of books, magazines,
www.ijmer.in
123
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
journals, articles, various reports of Reserve Bank of India and reports of national bank of Agriculture and Rural Development (NABARD) etc. Results & Discussion Profile of Jammu and Kashmir The State has a population of 1,25,41,302 with a population density of 56 and literacy rate 67.16. The State has been divided into three divisions; Jammu with 10 districts, Kashmir with 10 districts and Ladakh with 2districts (Census 2011). The State has 2 Lead Banks; J & K Bank for all the 10 districts of Kashmir division and district Rajouri and district Poonch of Jammu Division , and State Bank of India for 8 remaining districts of Jammu division and 2 districts of Ladakh Division (100th JKSLBC Report). The State has 21.63% of its population living Below Poverty Line (Economic Survey 2007-08). In such a scenario, the Banking Profile of the State (as shown in Table 1) consists of 24 Public Sector Banks having 481 branches, 9 Private Sector Banks with 887 branches, 2 Regional Rural Banks having 350 branches and 10 Cooperative Banks having 266 branches. In total there are 46 banks operating in the State with 1998 branches. Table 1: Profile of Banking/Financial sector in Jammu and Kashmir Public
Private
Sector
Sector
Banks
24
9
Branc hes
481
Rural
Banking Profile of the State
Branch Network (in Nos.)
www.ijmer.in
RRBs
Coopera
FI
Tot
tive Banks
s
al
2
10
1
46
887
350
266
14
199 8
SemiUrban
Urban
Total
124
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
1089
Banking
428
(Amoun
1998
Total
Total
C.D.
Advanc
Percentage
Deposi ts
Advan ces
Ratio
es to Priority
Priority Sector Advances to Total
Sector
Advances
Parame ters
481
86,232. 35
t in Rs. Crores)
of
42348.2 5
49.11%
21,457.9 8
50.67%
Advan
Share in
Agricult
Share in Total
ces
total
ure
to
Advance
Advanc
Weake r
s(%)
es
14.55%
6,872.68
Advances (%)
sectio ns 6,161.9 8
16.22%
Source: 100th JKSLBC Report Endeavors of banks towards Financial Inclusion in the state 1) Pradhan Mantri Jan Dhan Yojana (PMJDY): Pradhan Mantri Jan Dhan Yojana (PMJDY) was launched across the country on 28th of August 2014 as a comprehensive Financial Inclusion Package so as to ensure access to financial services by all and timely adequate credit to the excluded sections, i.e., weaker sections and lower income groups of the country. It emphasizes on an urgent need to push the Financial Inclusion among the financially excluded segment of the society so as to have financial stability and sustainability of economic and social order.Progress on number of accounts opened under Pradhan Mantri Jan Dhan Yojana upto31st March, 2016 is given below:
www.ijmer.in
125
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Table 2: Progress of Pradhan Mantri Jan Dhan Yojana in Jammu and Kashmir S.No
Bank
No. of A/Cs opened
. Rural
Urban
Total
No. of
No. of
Rupay Debit
zero balance
cards issued
account s
1
Public Sector Banks
2,14,837
1,51,427
3,66,264
3,13,694
81,913
2
Private Sector Banks
11,65,920
1,28,266
12,94,186
11,30,685
6,05,428
3
RRBs
1,01,666
34,884
1,36,550
40,239
58,198
4
Cooperativ e Banks
7,979
3,955
11,934
2,171
5,089
Total
14,90,40
3,78,53
18,08,93
14,86,78
7,50,628
2
2
4
9
Source: 100th JKSLBC Report 2) Opening of no-frill accounts Reserve Bank of India in the year 2005 issued circulars to all scheduled commercial, regional, cooperative and rural banks directing them to “open zero balance or no-frill accounts” with nil or minimum balance so that more people could access banking services. Banks were also advised to give wide publicity to such facilities. These no-frill accounts with zero or very minimum balance as well as charges made such accounts accessible to vast sections of the population. Further banks have been advised to provide small overdrafts in such accounts.
www.ijmer.in
126
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
3) Issuance of Kisan Credit Card The Kisan credit card (KCC) scheme introduced in the year 1998 has emerged as an innovative credit delivery mechanism to meet the production credit requirements of the farmers in a timely and hassle free manner. The scheme is under implementation in the entire country by the vast institutional credit framework involving commercial, rural banks & others and has received wide acceptability amongst farmers & bankers. Bank wise implementation of Kisan credit card is shown in table 3. Table 3: Position of KCCs issued in state of Jammu and Kashmir Name of the Bank
Cumulative Position ofKCCs issued since inception No. of cases sanctioned
No. of cards issued
AmountDisbursed (Rs. In Lakh)
Public Sector Banks
146824
142537
110267.97
Private
550369
525877
555268.23
216388
140132
111985.75
87000
75346
19419.21
1000581
883892
796941.2
Sector Banks Regional Rural Banks Co-operative Banks Total
Source: 100th JKSLBC Report
www.ijmer.in
127
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
4) Relaxation on know-your-customer (KYC) norms KYC requirements for opening of bank accounts were relaxed in case of small accounts in the year 2005 thereby simplifying procedures so as to make easy access to banking services. The banks were also permitted to take any evidence as to the identity & address of the customer to their satisfaction. 5) Use of technology to expand outreach RBI in the year 2015 observed that the coverage of banking services in unbanked villages is skewed towards the BC model and the ratio of branches to BC is very low and emphasized that for increasing banking penetration and financial inclusion, brick and mortar branches are an integral component. Accordingly, as per RBI directives 104 villages having population >5000 without a bank-branch of Scheduled Commercial Banks were identified in J&K State (as per Census 2011), which were allocated by J&K SLBC among 8 major banks operating in the State for opening branches .The relative Roadmap along with the achievement of concerned banks as on 31st March, 2016 is given below: Table 4: Financial Inclusion Plan of J&K State Name
of
the bank
Number
Total
Number
of villages with
Achieve-
of existing branches in the State as on 31st
business in J&K
population >5000 allocated for opening of new branches
as on 31st Mar., 2016
From January 2016 to March,
From April 2016 to March
ment as on 31st March, 2016
2016
2017
Mar, 2016
(Rs. in Crores)
Total
J&K Bank
740
78,837
7
33
40
01
State Bank
188
18,466
3
17
20
…
www.ijmer.in
128
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
of India Punjab National Bank
104
7,430
2
10
12
…
HDFC Bank
73
3,525
2
9
11
…
ICICI Bank
36
893
1
5
6
…
Canara Bank
32
938
1
4
5
…
UCO Bank
20
709
1
4
5
…
Central Bank of India
19
776
1
4
5
…
1212
1,11,574
18
86
104
01
Total
Source: 100th JKSLBC Report 6) SHG-Bank linkage Programme Reserve Bank of India has desired to have a proper review of disbursement of credit through Self Help Groups (SHGs), as it is an effective tool for delivering credit to rural poor for their economic empowerment and an alternate loan delivery system, which minimizes the cost of operation and transaction for the banks. The cumulative position of achievement under Self Help Group (SHG) Scheme up to the end of March, 2016is shown below:
www.ijmer.in
129
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Table 5: Progress achieved under SHG Scheme up to the end of March 2016 in J&K state (Amt. in Crores of Rupees) Name of
SHGs
SHGs
SHGs
Credit
Bank
formed
savings
Credit
disbursed
linked
linked
J&K Bank
9521
8674
5179
32.15
SBI
3517
3517
3517
26.23
JKGB
2709
2678
2495
16.02
EDB
1199
1199
1029
16.56
J&K SCB
736
732
714
2.39
PNB
608
608
472
1.96
JCCB
333
333
333
1.28
BCCB
297
297
291
2.01
ACCB
86
86
68
0.92
Other Banks/FIs
281
275
212
1.96
19287
18399
14310
101.48
Total
Source: 100th JKSLBC Report 7) Government Sponsored Schemes Various government sponsored schemes operating in the state are National
Rural
Livelihood
Mission
(NRLM),
Prime
Ministers
Employment Generation Programme (PMEGP) and Scheduled caste, Scheduled Tribe and other backward classes (SC/ST/OBC). Against Annual Action Plan 2015-16 a target of Rs.127.09 Crore for 8,884 www.ijmer.in
130
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
beneficiaries for all banks operating in the State, the achievement as on 31st March, 2016under three major Government Sponsored Schemes is of the order of Rs.107.70 Crore spread over 6,201 beneficiaries in all the three regions of the State thereby registering an achievement of 85% of the target in financial and 70% in physical terms, against achievement of 73% in financial & 45% in Physical terms during the corresponding period of previous financial year. The achievement under these schemes is shown in table6. Table 6: Achievement under Government Sponsored Schemes in J&K State (Amount in Crores of Rupees) Name of the
Target
Achievement
Scheme
%age Achievement
A/C
Amt.
A/C
Amt.
Physi cal
Fina ncial
Terms NRLM
4379
31.77
3759
21.51
86
68
PMEGP
1760
76.76
2015
82.48
114
107
SC/ST/OBC
2745
18.56
427
3.71
16
20
Total
8884
127.0
6201
107.7
70
85
9
0
Source: 100th JKSLBC Report Under NRLM scheme banks have disbursed an amount of Rs. 21.51 crore to 3759 beneficiaries (including 133 cases of previous year) against a target of Rs. 31.77 crore for 4,379 beneficiaries. This shows the achievement of 68% in financial and 86% in physical terms. Concerning PMEGP Scheme (consisting of 3 components, i.e., KVIC,
www.ijmer.in
131
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
KVIB & DIC) banks have disbursed an amount of Rs. 82.48 crore to 2015 beneficiaries against the annual target of Rs.76.76 Crore for 1,760 beneficiaries upto31st March, 2016(which includes 379 sanctioned pending cases of previous year) for setting up of employment generating units thereby achieving 107% and 114% of target in financial and physical terms respectively. As far as SC/ST/OBC Schemes are concerned, an amount of Rs.3.71 Crore to 427 beneficiaries (which includes Rs.0.71 Crore of previous year’s 90 pending cases) has been disbursed upto the end of March, 2016against annual target of Rs.18.56 Crore for 2,745 beneficiaries thereby registering an achievement of 20% & 16% in financial and physical terms respectively. In case of NULM (SEP-I) banks have disbursed an amount of Rs.14.50 Crore to 835 beneficiaries (which includes Rs.0.10 Crore of previous year’s 6 sanctioned cases) upto 31st March, 2016 against annual target of Rs.20.00 Crore for 1000 beneficiaries, thus registering an achievement of 73% & 84% in financial and physical terms respectively. Conclusion Banks play an important role in meeting the growing credit needs of rural India.Banks need to have specific strategies to expand the outreach of its services in order to promote financial inclusion. Bank should give wide publicity to the facility of no frills account. Technology can be a very valuable tool in providing access to banking products in remote areas. ATMs, cash dispensing machines can be modified suitably to make them user friendly for people who are illiterate, less educated or do not know how to make use of it. There is a need to redesign business strategies followed by banks so as to promote financial inclusion of low-income groups by treating them both as an opportunity as well as a corporate social responsibility. It may appear that taking banking to the sections constituting "the bottom of the pyramid" may not be profitable but it should always be remembered www.ijmer.in
132
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
that even the relatively low margins on high volumes can be a very profitable proposition. Financial inclusion can emerge as commercial profitable business. References 1. Census (2011). Data Retrieved from http://census2011.co.in 2. Dev, Mahendra S (2006). “Financial Inclusion: Issues and Challenges”. Economic and Political Weekly. October 14, 2006. pp. 4310 – 4313. 3. http://www.rbi.org.in/SCRIPTS/BS_SpeechesView.aspx?Id=432,RBI 4. http://www.jkbank.net/csr.php , J & K Bank Website 5. Indian Express (2012). “Financial Inclusion - India v/s World” a news-item published in the supplement - ‘Business’, of the daily newspaper ‘The Indian Express’, July 27, 2012, Pune Edn., pp 15. 6. J & K Bank (2015). 100thState Level Bankers’ Committee, Jammu & Kashmir 7. Thapar A (2013). A study on the effectiveness of FI program in India. VSRDIJBMR, Vol 3, June 2013: 211-216.
www.ijmer.in
133
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
A STUDY OF MOBILE PHONE USAGE BY COLLEGE STUDENTS Kusum Sajwan Negi and Department of Education H.N.B. Garhwal (A Central) University S.R.T. Campus Badshahi-Thaul Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand India
Sunita Godiyal Department of Education H.N.B. Garhwal (A Central) University S.R.T. Campus Badshahi-Thaul Tehri Garhwal, Uttarakhand India
Abstract: The aim of this study is to assess the mobile phone usage by college students in S.R.T. campus (Hemvati Nandan Bahuguna Garhwal (A Central) University Uttarakhand). A sample of (50 arts and 50 Science) 100 students were taken from the S.R.T. campus. Self made questionnaire was used as a tool for data collection. The study reveals the significance difference in mobile phone usage by students. Key Words: Mobile phone, College students, Usage, S.R.T.Campus. INTRODUCTION: In recent years, the use of Mobile phones has played a vital role in communication across the globe; citizens of the India like people in other countries are consumed in the technological revolution. It is hard for members of Generation Y, who were born between the early 1980s and the early 2000s, to imagine a time when instant and constant communication was not a main focus for them socially. A generation ago, people left their homes without any form of electronic device; made plans in person; wrote personal, hand-written letters; and knocked on neighbours’ doors to see if they were home. There things of cause, still happens, But today people have mobile phones. Mobile phones have emerged to become indispensible tools of daily life in the hands of mankind (Tessa Jones, 2014). www.ijmer.in
134
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Although the first mobile phone came into use more that forty years ago, the technology has gained its peak-popularity in the period of the last ten years. The advent of numerous applications that provide the leisure of text messaging free of cost, lower cell rates and easy availability and accessibility of internet use on mobile phones are among the prominent causes leading to the increase in its usage. India‘s telecommunication network is the second largest in the world, based on the total number of telephone users. Every month, new technologies are being created and today‘s marvels quickly become yesterday‘s news. While these technologies capture attention and have usability and the easiness of everyday life (Krithika, M., Vasantha, S. 2013). Mobile phones have become an important and widely available communication tool at an astonishingly rapid pace over the last two decades, used routinely for a wide variety of purposes by a large number of people. Cell Phones a growing concern , With the advancement of modern technology and in particular mobile technology it is no wonder that cell phones and their popularity are on the rise. It is perhaps because of their ease of use and their ability to facilitate other applications. It is because of this that many experts in psychology have begun to study the effects of cell phones on our society. OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY: 1. To compare the mobile phone usage by male and female college students. 2. To compare the mobile phone usage by science and arts students. HYPOTHESIS OF THE STUDY: 1. There is no significance difference between mobile phone usage by male and female students. 2. There is no significance difference between the mobile phone usage of science and Arts students. www.ijmer.in
135
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
DELIMITATION OF THE STUDY: This Study is limited to Swami Ramtirth campus Hemvati Nandan Bahuguna Garhwal University (A central university) Srinagar Garhwal Uttarakhand. REVIEW OF RELATED LITERATURE: Aoki and Downes (2004), focused on the behavioral and psychological aspects of cell phone usage among college students. They tried to find the reasons behind why a technology is adopted in a particular way. They identified several attitudinal factors based on the exploratory study including, necessity in modern times, cost efficiency when compared to landline phone, safety or security, and dependency. The study also endeavoured to look at the motivational and behavioral characteristics of mobile phone usage. The authors tried to combine their results and the result of previous research to find the trends in usage by the youth, why college students in the US use the cell phone, what they think of the technology, and how they use it‖ (p. 352). Campbel (2005), examined that mobile phone has turned from a technological tool to a social tool. Mobile phone has become status symbol for young people and it is viewed as a fashion accessory. Surveys show that they prefer it more than television and internet. It is deemed as a symbol of independence from one’s family. It has functional, relational, negative effects like ostracism and family bullying. It also has an impact on evolving relationships within the family. Chen et al. (2007), proposed that having mobile phone is necessary for college students to keep in touch with their family. Also they use mobile phones to fulfill their family roles by sharing their experiences with and getting an emotional and psychic support from their family.
www.ijmer.in
136
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Walsh, White, Cox and Young (2010), showed that age and self-identity significantly predicted the frequency of mobile phone use. In contrast, age (younger), gender (Female), self-identify and in-group norm predicted young peoples’ mobile phone involvement. Thomee, Harenstam and Hagberg (2011), highlighted the high mobile phone use was associated with sleep disturbances and symptoms of depression for the men and symptoms of depression for 1year follow-up for women. It was advised to set limits for mobile usage and accessibility as it trigger mental health outcomes. The study was conducted on 20-24 year adults’ mental health outcomes. The study was conducted on 20-24 years adults. Jones Tessa (2014), Students Cell phone addiction and their opinions, conducted field observations to examine Elon students’ behavior while walking around campus, along with an online survey. Findings suggest that students seem to be addicted to their cell phones, with 64 percent of students observed on campus interacting with their device one way or another. Nevertheless, a survey of students found that they believe that the need of self-gratification achieved through excessive cell phone use has negative psychological effects on them. Overall, this research would impart insight into the addictive world of technology, and the impacts cell phones have on students’ behavior. Singh, Des Raj (2015) found in his study that the personality trait of majority students (Male/female out of the selected sample of 120 students) was found of extrovert/ Ambivert type, very few cases have shown introvert trait of personality. The majority number of students have shown good level of adjustment, none student have shown the poor level. Insignificant correlation (no correlation) was found between personality trait and adjustment level, which shows that both the variables are independent and personality trait (extrovert/Ambivert)
www.ijmer.in
137
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
does not affect the adjustment level of a person in this particular situation. METHOD: Survey method is adopted for this study. SAMPLE: The sample of the study is consisted of 100 students studying in arts and science stream in Swami Ramtirth campus Hemvati Nandan Bahuguna Garhwal University Uttarakhand. TOOL: Self made Questionnaire used to assess the mobile phone usages of college students. This questionnaire consists of 15 items. ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF DATA: For the analysis of collected data Mean, S.D., and t- test were used. Table 1 Table 1, Shows the mean, s.d. and t- test for mobile phone usage by male and female students. Students Gender
N
Mean
S.d.
t-test
Level of significance (0.05 level of significance)
Male
42
24.91
4.198
4.5
significant
Female
58
21.52
3.26
www.ijmer.in
138
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
25 20 15
Mea n
10 5
S. D
0
Mean Male
Female
Table 1, reveals that the mean score of male students of S.R.T. campus is 24.91 and the mean of female students of the campus is 21.52 the calculated value of “t” is 4.5 which is greater than the table value at 0.05 level of significance. It means that there exists a significance difference between male and female students on mobile phone usage. Therefore, the hypothesis that, ‘There is no significance difference between mobile phone usage by male and female students’ is rejected. It means that there exists a significant difference between male and female students on mobile phone usage. Table - 2 Mean, S D, and t- test of the mobile phone usage by science and Arts students: Students Stream
N
Mean
S.D.
t -test
Science Arts
50 50
24.16 21.72
3.48 4.47
3.067
www.ijmer.in
Level of significance (0.05 level of significance) significant
139
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
30 mea n sd
20 10 sd
0 Science
mean Arts
Table 2, reveals that the mean score of science students is more than Arts students. The calculated value of “t” is 3.067 which is greater than the table value at 0.05 level of significance. So hypothesis 2 ‘There is no significance difference between mobile phone usage by science and Arts students’ is rejected. It means there exists significant difference between mobile phone usage of science and arts students of the campus. FINDINGS AND CONCLUSION: Table 1, Shows that the mean score of male students is more than female students which means male students are more aware about technology, and are more curious about mobile device and related new apps. They make friends and have good circle and share their knowledge to each other. Male students spent their most of time out of the home in comparison to female students. As the conclusion it can be said that gender of student has significant influence on mobile phone usage. Table 2, Shows that the mean score of science students is more than arts students it means science students are more aware about use www.ijmer.in
140
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
of mobile phone. Science students are more techno friendly than arts students. Science students believe in experiments and made use of it in there day to day life. Technology and science are the two sides of the same coin so they believe in the use of new technology. As the conclusion it can be said that stream of a student has significant influence on mobile phone usage. Analysis reveals that every student is using mobile for different purposes. Some students use mobiles only for calling and some make use of the device for social networking, for gaming and for study. Mobile phones have become a need for everyone. This study will help the guardians and teachers to decide that whether they should allow their ward to spend more time on mobile phones or not.
References: 1. Aoki K, and Downes EJ (2004), An analysis of young people's use of and attitudes toward cell phones.Telemat. Info. 20: 349-364. 2. Bianch, A and Phillips J (2005), Psychological predictors of problem mobile phone use. Cyber Psychol. Behav., 8: 39-51. 3. Campbell. M (2005), “Impact of Mobile Phone on Young People’s Social life” –Queensland University of Technology. 4. Hui-Jen Yang and Yun-Long Lay(October 19-21, 2011), Factors affecting college students mobile phone dependence and anxiety., Proceeding of the World congress on engineering and computer science(WCECS 2011), Vol. II, San Francisco, USA. 5. Jones Tessa (2014), Students Cell phone addiction and their opinions, The Elon Journal of Communication, Vol.3, No. 1, 2014.
www.ijmer.in
undergraduate
research
in
141
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
6. Krithika, M. , Vasantha, S.(2013), The mobile phone usage among Teens and young adult impact of invading Technology., International Journal of innovative research in science engineering and Technology, An ISO 3297: 2007 certified organization., Vol.2, Issue 12, D 7. Singh Arun Kumar(2009) Tests, measurements and research methods
in
behavioural
sciences.Bharti
Bhawan
publishers
&
distributors 8. Singh, Des Raj (2015). A study of Correlation between personality and adjustment of the students, studying in secondary level, Educational Vision,
Volume1,No.1,
pp.
63-66.
C.T.E Uttarakhand
Chapter,
Dehradun, www.cteuttrakhand.com, 9. Thomee.S., Harenstam.A. and Mats Hagberg, BMC Public Health (31stJan2011). “Mobile Phone Use and Stress, Sleep Disturbances and Symptoms of Depression among Young Adults”.- a perspective cohort study.11:66. doi:10.1186/1471-2458-11-66. 10. Tejwani sapna,( April 2013), Empowering learners of 21st century through M-Learning :Need of the hour. Edutracks vol 12 no 8. 11. Walsh.S.P.,White.K.M., Cox.S. and McD.Young.R. (15 Sept, 2010). “Keeping in constant touch: The predictors of Young Australians’ Mobile Phone Involvement.”
www.ijmer.in
142
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
DEMOGRAPHIC AND EDUCATIONAL STATUS OF SCHEDULED CASTES P.Ramadevi Ph.D, Research Scholar Dept. of Rural Development & Social Work Sri Krishnadevaraya University Anantapuramu-Andhra Pradesh Introduction: India is a welfare State, committed to the welfare and development of its people in general and of vulnerable sections in particular. Preamble, Directive Principles of State Policy, Fundamental Rights and specific sections, namely Article 38, 39 and 46 in the Constitution of India stand testimony to its people. As a matter of strategy, the Government of India has resorted to planned development for minimizing inequality in income, status and opportunities for its people. This strategy is directed to secure distributive justice and utilization of economic resources to sub-serve common good. Development is essentially a process of change initiated with an objective of improving the quality of life. For certain sections of society, who are considered as weaker sections, the process of change would aim at bringing them into the mainstream of socio-economic system. It is also necessary to ensure that there is no discrimination against any section of our society. In India, certain social groups such as the Scheduled Castes (SCs) and Scheduled Tribes (STs) have historically been disadvantaged and vulnerable. Population The population of India as per 2011 census was 1,210,854,977. India added 181.5 million to its population since 2001, slightly lower than the population of Brazil. India with 2.4 per cent of the world's surface area accounts for 17.5 per cent of its population. Uttar Pradesh www.ijmer.in
143
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
is the most populous state with roughly 200 million people. A little over 5 out of 10 Indians live in the six states of Uttar Pradesh Maharashtra, Bihar, West Bengal, Andhra Pradesh and Madhya Pradesh. Population Size of 2011 Census- India Table 2.1: Population Size, Growth Rate and Sex Ratio, 2011 India/State/ Union Territory
Persons
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
INDIA Uttar Pradesh Maharashtra Bihar West Bengal Andhra Pradesh Madhya Pradesh Tamil Nadu Rajasthan Karnataka Gujarat Odisha Kerala Jharkhand Assam Punjab Chhattisgarh Haryana NCT of Delhi Jammu & Kashmir Uttarakhand Sub Total
1,210,193,422 199,581,477 112,372,972 103,804,637 91,347,736 84,665,533 72,597,565 72,138,958 68,621,012 61,130,704 60,383,628 41,947,358 33,387,677 32,966,238 31,169,272 27,704,236 25,540,196 25,353,081 16,753,235 12,548,926 10,116,752 1,184,131,193
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Himachal Pradesh Tripura Meghalaya Manipur Nagaland Goa Arunachal Pradesh Puducherry UT Mizoram Chandigarh UT
6,856,509 3,671,032 2,964,007 2,721,756 1,980,602 1,457,723 1,382,611 1,244,464 1,091,014 1,054,686
www.ijmer.in
Per cent of India’s Population A.Pop. 10 M + 100.00 16.49 9.29 8.58 7.55 7.00 6.00 5.96 5.67 5.05 4.99 3.47 2.76 2.72 2.58 2.29 2.11 2.09 1.38 1.04 0.84 97.85 B. Pop. 1-10 M 0.57 0.30 0.24 0.22 0.16 0.12 0.11 0.10 0.09 0.09
Decadal Growth Rate 17.64 20.09 15.99 25.07 13.93 11.1 20.3 15.6 21.44 15.67 19.17 13.97 4.86 22.34 16.93 13.73 22.59 19.9 20.96 23.71 19.17
12.81 14.75 27.82 18.65 -0.47 8.17 25.92 27.72 22.78 17.1
Sex Ratio (Females per 1000 males) 940 908 925 916 947 992 930 995 926 968 918 978 1084 947 954 893 991 877 866 883 963
974 961 986 987 931 968 920 1038 975 818
144
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016 Sub Total 1 2 3 4 5
Sikkim Andaman & Nicobar Island UT Dadra & Nagar Haveli UT Daman & Diu UT Lakshadweep UT Sub Total
24,424,404 607,688
2.02 C. Pop. Below 1M 0.05
12.36
889
379,944
0.03
6.68
878
342,853
0.03
55.5
775
242,911 64,429 1,637,825
0.02 0.01 0.14
53.54 6.23
618 946
Source: Census of India, 2011, Registrar General, GOI, New Delhi, India According to 2011 census, India's total population in 2011 was 1.21 billion, up from 1.03 billion in 2001, thus adding 181 million people in one decade. However, the 2001 - 2011 decadal growth rates of 17.6%, compared to 21.5 recorded during 1991-2001, suggests slowing down of the growth. Table 2.1 gives the particulars of State-wise population trends. Distribution and Rate of Growth - States & UTs Uttar Pradesh, the state with 199.6 million people is India's most populous state accounting for 16.5% of country's population. Bihar (103.8) and Maharashtra (112.4) are other two states with more than 100 million people. Other large states are West Bengal with 91, Andhra Pradesh with 85, Madhya Pradesh with 73, and Tamil Nadu with 72 million people. Nearly 42.4% of Indians now live in formerly undivided Bihar, Uttar Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh and Rajasthan; a portion that has increased from 40% in 1991. Conversely, the proportion of Indians living in four Southern States of Kerala, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka and Andhra Pradesh has decreased from 22.5% in 1991 to 20.8% in 2011, causing concerns about their representation in parliamentary democracy. Out of the major states of India, Bihar with 25.1% growth rate during 2001-2011 is the fastest growing state. Decadal growth rates www.ijmer.in
145
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
have exceeded 20% in the entire core North India States - Bihar, Uttar Pradesh, Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh (including Jharkhand and Chhattisgarh). Kerala's growth during 2001-2011 of 4.9% is indicative of the state reaching stationary population in the next 10-20 years. Growth rate around 11-13% is reported by Punjab, Andhra Pradesh, and West Bengal and around 15-16% by Karnataka, Maharashtra and Tamil Nadu. Southern States are harbinger of population stabilization. Literacy Any one, above age 7 who can read and write in any language with an ability to understand was considered a literate. In censuses before 1991, children below the age 5 were treated as illiterates. The literacy rate taking the entire population into account is termed as "crude literacy rate” and taking the population from age 7 and above into account is termed as "effective literacy rate". Literacy: The Prime Concern of the Census 2011 India has witnessed remarkable progress in spread of literacy. Compared to barely 18 per cent of India's population recorded as literate in the first census after independence, according to the 2011 census, that proportion has gone up to 74 per cent. The achievement among males has been from 27 to 82 per cent in the 60 years. From less than one in 10 women counted as literate in 1951, today two out of three women are enumerated as literate. Nationally, the gender gap in spread of literacy began to narrow first in 1991 and the pace has accelerated. However, there are larger state variations in the gender gap with Rajasthan reporting nearly 28 percentage point gap and other core North Indian States like Bihar, Uttar Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh, Chhattisgarh and Jharkhand reporting a gap between male and female literacy rate of more than 20 percentage points. Compared to 2001, in 2011 male literacy rate increased by 6 percentage points but female literacy increased by nearly 12 percentage points, which is viewed as a www.ijmer.in
146
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
remarkable achievement. Some have attributed it to the success of Sarva Siksha Abhiyan, India's flagship programme launched in 2001-02 to universalize elementary education. Male literacy exceeds 75% throughout the country and exceeds 90% in Kerala and some of the smaller states. The achievement in female literacy in Bihar is noteworthy; from 33% in 2001, it has gone up to 53% or by 20 percentage points. The states causing concern as far as female literacy is concerned are Rajasthan and Andhra Pradesh- both have reported 8 percentage point increase during 2001-2011 and both have less than 60% female literacy. Table 2.2: Literacy Rate Trend in India 1951 – 2011 Census Year Persons Decadal Increase Males Females Gender Gap 1951
18.33
--
27.16
8.86
18.30
1961
28.3
9.97
40.40
15.35
25.05
1971
34.45
6.15
45.96
21.97
23.99
1981
43.57
9.12
56.38
29.76
26.62
1991
52.21
8.64
64.13
39.29
24.84
2001
64.83
12.64
75.26
53.67
21.59
2011
74.04
9.21
82.14
65.46
16.68
Source: Registrar General of Census, GOI, New Delhi, 2011 Literacy must be viewed in the context of its immense potential for bringing about transformation in the quality of Human life. Its impact on bringing about a paradigm shift in the direction a society progresses can never be overestimated - be it economic, social and political. Development in educational attainment means increase in literacy level. According to the definition in the census, any person aged seven and above who can read and write with understanding in any www.ijmer.in
147
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
language is literate. According to Millennium Development Goals of United Nations, universal primary education must be achieved by the year 2015. Eleventh five year plan has also targeted to increase the literacy rate of children of seven years of age and above to 85% by reducing the gender gap in literacy to 10 per cent by 2011-12. It should be clearly noted that educational development and literacy rate improvement are key factors influencing the demographic variables like fertility, mortality, migration etc. Education promotes quality of life, particularly with regards to life expectancy, infant mortality, learning and nutritional levels. The pace and progress of literacy rates as revealed by decennial census is very slow in India. In the span of fifty years i.e., from 1951 (18.33) to 2001 (64.83), there has been only marginal increase of 46.5 per cent in literacy rate. Between 1951 to 2001, female literacy shows a mere 44.7 per cent increase which is five times for the whole point. According to the census 2011, out of 74.04 per cent of literacy rate, the corresponding figures for male and female are 82.14 and 65.46 per cent respectively which means four out of five males and two out every three females of the age seven and above are literate in the country. Demographic Profile of Scheduled Castes As per 2011 Census Scheduled Castes are notified in 31 States/UTs of India. There are altogether 1,241 individual ethnic groups, etc. notified as Scheduled Castes in different States/UTs. There have been some changes in the List of SCs in States/ UTs during the last decade. The total population of Scheduled Castes is 20,13,78,086. Among them 10,35,35,165 are males and the remaining 9,78,42,921 are females. They constitute 16.63 per cent of total population of India as against 16.2 per cent in 2001. The decadal growth rate of Scheduled Caste population is 20.8 per cent, which is higher than general population.
www.ijmer.in
148
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
State-wise Distribution of SC Population The Table 2.3 reveals that major States of India, each having a population of more than 1 crore, together constitute about 76.98 per cent of India’s total SC population. Among these 9 States, the highest number of Scheduled Caste population was in Uttar Pradesh (41357608) followed by West Bengal (21463270), Bihar (16567325), Tamil Nadu (14438445), Andhra Pradesh (13878078), Maharashtra (13275898), Madhya Pradesh (11342320) and Karnataka (10474992) . Table-2.3: State-wise Scheduled Caste Population in India
Name
No. of Households
Male
Female
Total
Jammu &
183020
486232
438759
924991
Himachal Pradesh
358212
876300
852952
1729252
Punjab
1717888
4639875
4220304
8860179
Chandigarh
40694
106356
92730
199086
Uttarakhand
363305
968586
923930
1892516
Haryana
992096
2709656
2403959
5113615
NCT Of Delhi
527307
1488800
1323509
2812309
Rajasthan
2279366
6355564
5866029
Uttar Pradesh
7375437
Bihar
3073109
2167697 5 8606253
1968063 3 7961072
1222159 3 4135760
Sikkim
5930
14454
13821
8 1656732 5 28275
Manipur
20302
48714
48328
97042
Mizoram
274
807
411
1218
Tripura
154112
334370
320548
654918
3533
9157
8198
17355
468568
1145314
1086007
2231321
Meghalaya Assam www.ijmer.in
149
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
West Bengal
4861303
1100330
1045996
2146327
Jharkhand
753644
4 2043458
6 1942186
0 3985644
Odisha
1669787
3617808
3570655
7188463
Chhattisgarh
749457
1641738
1632531
3274269
Madhya Pradesh
2402342
5908638
5433682
Gujarat
817281
2110331
1964116
1134232 0 4074447
Daman & Diu Dadra & Nagar Maharashtra
1288 1353 2898245
3151 3339 6767759
2973 2847 6508139
6124 6186 1327589
Andhra Pradesh
3429973
6913047
6965031
Karnataka
2178501
5264545
5210447
8 1387807 8 1047499
Goa Kerala
5545 725582
12627 1477808
12822 1561765
2 25449 3039573
Tamil Nadu
3591953
7204687
7233758
Puducherry
45409
95512
100813
1443844 5 196325
41694816
1035351
978429
2013780
21
86
Total
Source: Registrar General, Census of India, 65 2011.
In 5 States/UTs viz. Andhra Pradesh, Goa, Kerala, Tamil Nadu and Puducherry out of 31 States/UTs the female population is higher than male population. On the other hand in Mizoram the percentage female population touched the lowest ebb of 33.74 per cent (Table2.3). The average size of Scheduled Caste households in India is 4.83 persons. In 9 States/UTs, the average size of Scheduled Caste household is 5 and above persons. In the remaining states the average size of Scheduled Caste households is above 4 persons and below 5 persons. Like population, in the average size of household tops the list with 5.61 persons in Uttar Pradesh. On the other hand lowest household average size of 4.02 persons is registered in Tamil Nadu.
www.ijmer.in
150
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Demographic features of Scheduled Castes in Andhra Pradesh The total population of Andhra Pradesh, as per the 2011 Census is 8, 45,80,777 as per table 2.4. Of this, 1,38,78,078 (16.41 per cent) are Scheduled Castes (SCs), of which 69,13,047 (50.19 per cent) are males and the rest 69,65,031 (49.81 per cent) are females. Out of the total SC population, 78.85 (82.82 % in 2001) per cent are residing in rural areas and the rest 21.85(17.18% in 2001) per cent are residing in urban areas. The share of the rural population has been declining from Census to Census, except during 1991-2001, where a slight increase is recorded. The share of the Scheduled Castes population in the total population, which was 13.82 per cent in 1961, declined to 13.27 per cent in 1971, then increased to 14.85 per cent in 1981 and to 15.93 per cent in 1991, and thereafter increased to 16.19 per cent in 2001. As per 2011 census the share of SC population increased to 16.41 per cent. The share of the Scheduled Caste population to the total population of India in 2011 is 16.23, which is almost nearest to that of Andhra Pradesh (16.41 per cent).
www.ijmer.in
151
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Table -2.4: Scheduled Castes and General Population in Andhra Pradesh from 1961 to 2011 Census Scheduled Castes Male Cen sus
Popula tion
Year
Female % Gro wth
Popula tion
1961
-
Total
246129 1
Popula
%
Popula
%
Gro wth
tion
Gro wth
tion
Gro wth
tion
Gro wth
-
Rate 497361 6 (13.82)
292741 6
284713 2
577454 8
(13.30)
1981
403924 2
www.ijmer.in
15.68
(13.25) 37.98
392248 8
Total
%
(13.81)
1971
Female
Popula
(13.83)
16.52
Male
%
Rate
Rate 251232 5
Total population
Rate
Popula
%
tion
Gro wth
Rate
Rate
-
181616 71
-
178217 76
-
359834 47
-
16.1
220086 63
21.18
214940 45
20.61
435027 08
20.9
37.88
271089 22
23.17
264407 51
23.01
535496 73
23.1
(13.27) 37.77
796173 0
152
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
1991
(14.9)
(14.84)
(14.87)
537965 4
521241 2
105920 66
33.18
32.89
(15.95)
(15.90)
(15.93)
622801 1
611148 5
123394 96
15.77
17.25
2001
(16.17)
(16.22)
(16.19)
2011
691304 7
696503 1
138780 78
(16.29)
11
(16.53)
13.97
(16.41)
33.04
337245 81
24.4
327834 27
23.99
665080 08
24.2
16.5
385274 13
14.24
376825 94
14.94
762100 07
14.59
12.47
424421 46
10.16
421386 31
11.83
845807 77
10.98
Source: Reports of Registrar General, Census of India, , Government of India from 1961 to 2011.
www.ijmer.in
153
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
In terms of decadal growth, there was a growth of 16.10 per cent in the SC population during 1961-1971, followed by 37.88 per cent increase in the next decade (1971-1981). It fell to 33.04 per cent in the following decade, 1981-1991. It further fell to 16.50 per cent during 1991-2001. Once again, it fell to 12.47 per cent during 2001-2011.The highest growth rate was recorded during 1971-1981. District-wise Scheduled Castes Population in Andhra Pradesh The district-wise Scheduled Castes population is presented in Table 2.5. Table-2.5: District-wise Scheduled Caste Population and their Percentage in Andhra Pradesh as per 2011 Census S. No.
Name of the
No of
Total
District
Households
Male
Female
Population
%
1
Adilabad
119756
242844
245752
488596
17.82
2
Anantapuramu
134043
292379
290756
583135
14.29
3
Chittoor
192940
389582
396178
785760
18.82
4
East Godavari
252583
468883
476386
945269
18.54
5
Guntur
247861
476333
481074
957407
19.59
6
Hyderabad
57750
124313
123614
247927
6.29
7
Karimnagar
184163
352481
357276
709757
18.8
8
Khammam
123602
229905
232991
462896
16.55
9
Krishna
233868
435412
435651
871063
19.28
10
Kurnool
159796
370215
367730
737945
18.21
11
Mahbubnagar
152734
356099
352855
708954
17.49
12
Medak
119950
266413
271534
537947
17.73
13
Nalgonda
156603
318359
319026
637385
18.27
14
Nizamabad
89598
178798
192276
371074
14.54
15
Prakasam
184646
397242
390619
787861
23.19
16
Rangareddy
149880
328011
324031
652042
12.31
www.ijmer.in
154
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016 17
SPS Nellore
172098
332673
333915
666588
22.49
18
Srikakulam
65323
125214
130450
255664
9.46
19
Visakhapatnam
83516
162873
166613
329486
7.68
20
Vizianagaram
63569
121493
126235
247728
10.57
21
Warangal
151556
307709
308393
616102
17.54
22
West Godavari
219250
403693
408005
811698
20.62
23
Y.S.R. Kadapa
114888
232123
233671
465794
16.16
3429973
6913047
6965031
13878078
16.41
Total
Source: Reports of Directorate of Census Operations, Government of AP 2011, Hyderabad. As per table 2.5 the total population of Scheduled Castes as per the 2011 Census was 138.78 lakhs in the State. The Scheduled Castes constitute 16.41 per cent of the total population of the State which is very slightly lower than India’s total percentage of SC population 16.63 per cent. It is interesting to note that the proportion of SC population has gone up in the State over the last decade, which was 16.50 per cent in 2001. There are 15 districts whose SC population percentage is higher than the State average. In terms of percentage of SC population Prakasam district stands in the first place, followed by SPS Nellore and West Godavari. In Telangana region Karimnagar and in Rayalaseema region Chittoor districts top the list. In terms of actual population Guntur registered highest SC population (957, 407). In Telangana and Rayalaseema regions Karimnagar and Chittoor are having highest SC population. In terms of female as well as male SC population Guntur district tops the list. It is clear that Coastal districts top in actual as well as total percentage of SC population.
www.ijmer.in
155
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Education of Children Belonging To Scheduled Castes Discrimination faced by children belonging to Scheduled Castes requires in-depth understanding and analysis; unlike the tribal children, they are very often part of mixed social congregations. The increasing trend of urbanization and migration among SC families is an important contributory factor to the poor state of their education. They live in jhuggis, unrecognized or resettlement colonies with minimal facilities both at home and at the school in the neighbourhood. Despite greater awareness and concern among parents to educate their children, harsh living conditions and poverty make it difficult to ensure a full cycle of quality education. The adoption of RTE marks a fundamental change in elementary education. It underlines education as an entitlement, emphasizing non discrimination, inclusion, equity as equally critical in the attainment of this right. This framework is critical to the participation of SC children in elementary education in the 12th Plan period. Under Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan, the enrollment of SC children increased substantially. There was also a significant drop in the number of out of school SC children from 8.2% in 2005 to 5.9% in 2009, thus reflecting a positive trend of increased awareness among parents towards accessing education, despite economic and social constraints, as also validating the effort by the State to make schools available to SC children. Current efforts to promote elementary education among SC children have been a mix of both general and specific/targeted3. General efforts include: expanding infrastructure for physical access, incentives like uniforms/ books/ cycles, tracking disaggregated data to reflect social groups and gender dimensions (with all its limitations), provision of mid day meals etc. Many specific/ targeted programmes www.ijmer.in
156
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
like uniforms, books that were originally special provisions for SC; ST children have been expanded to cover all children. Hostels and scholarships under the Ministry of Social Welfare are examples of specific/ targeted programmes for SC children. Drop out is a critical issue for the SC child, with many of them getting ‘pushed out’ of the system on account of multiple factors. Under achievement in school is common among SC children. Other compounding factors are continued untouchability and discriminatory practices in classroom/school/mid day meal, tasks assigned; practices that hurt the dignity of the child in school; delay/non-implementation of scholarships on time; practices that prohibit/ prevent equal participation of SC children in the cultural and community life of the school; unduly harsh verbal abuse and corporal punishments, frustration from teacher neglect etc. The lack of quality institutional delivery in elementary education and institutional bias in not providing equal and equitable opportunities to SC children cannot be overemphasized. A major gap that is noticed in the earlier policies is lack of recognition and understanding of caste based untouchability and discrimination on SC children in schools, and consequently no special efforts to address them. Studies and reports from the field and academic circles have resulted in discrimination being recognized and brought into the premises of the RTE under sections 8 and 9 of the Act. Implementation remains the challenge. Constitutional provisions Article 46 of the Constitution states that, "The State shall promote, with special care, the education and economic interests of the weaker sections of the people, and, in particular of the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes, and shall protect them from social injustice and all forms of social exploitation". Articles 330, 332, 335, 338 www.ijmer.in
157
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
to 342 and the entire Fifth and Sixth Schedules of the Constitution deal with special provisions for implementation of the objectives set forth in Article 46. These provisions need to be fully utilised for the benefit of these weaker sections in our society. After independence, the Government of India has taken number of steps to strengthen the educational base of the persons belonging to the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes. Pursuant to the National Policy on Education-1986 and the Programme of Action (POA)-1992, the following special provisions for SCs and STs have been incorporated in the existing schemes of the Departments of Elementary Education and Literacy and Secondary and Higher Education: a. relaxed norms for opening of primary/middle schools; a primary school within one km walking distance from habitations of population up to 200 instead of habitations of up to 300 population. b. Abolition of tuition fee in all States in Government Schools at least up to the upper primary level. In fact, most of the states have abolished tuition fees for SC/ST students up to the senior secondary level. c. Incentives like free textbooks, uniforms, stationery, schools bags, etc., for these students. d. The Constitutional (86th Amendment) Bill, notified on 13 December 2002, provides for free and compulsory elementary education as a Fundamental Right, for all children in the age group of 6-14 years. e. Sarva
Shiksha
Abhiyan
(SSA):Sarva
Shiksha
Abhiyan
(SSA)(External website that opens in a new window) is a historic stride towards achieving the long cherished goal of Universalisation of Elementary Education (UEE) through a time bound integrated approach, in partnership with States. SSA, which promises to www.ijmer.in
158
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
change the face of elementary education sector of the country, aims to provide useful and quality elementary education to all children in the 6-14 age group by 2010. The main features of the programme are: f.
Focus on girls, especially belonging to SC/ST communities and minority groups.
g. Back to school campus for out of school girls. h. Free textbooks for girls. i.
Special coaching remedial classes for girls and a congenial learning environment.
j.
Teachers' sensitisation programmes to promote equitable learning opportunities.
k. Special focus for innovative projects related to girls education. l.
Recruitment of 50 per cent female teachers.
District Primary Education Programme (DPEP) The thrust of the scheme is on disadvantaged groups like girls, SCs/STs, working children, urban deprived children, disabled children, etc. There are specific strategies for girls and SCs/STs; however, physical targets are fixed, in an integrated manner including coverage of these groups as well. According to a study by NIEPA, schools in DPEP districts had more than 60 per cent students belonging to SC/ST communities. Mahila Samakhya (MS) MS addresses traditional gender imbalances in educational access and achievement. This involves enabling women (especially from socially and economically disadvantaged and marginalised groups) to address and deal with problems of isolation and lack of self-confidence, www.ijmer.in
159
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
oppressive social customs and struggle for survival, all of which inhibit their empowerment. National Programme for Education of Girls at Elementary Level (NPEGEL) The NPEGEL under the existing scheme of Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan (SSA) provides additional components for education of girls under privileged/ disadvantaged at the elementary level. The Scheme is being implemented in Educationally Backward Blocks (EBBs) where the level of rural female literacy is less than the national average and the gender gap is above the national average, as well as in blocks of districts that have at least 5 per cent SC/ST population and where SC/ST female literacy is below 10 per cent based on 1991. Shiksha Karmi Project (SKP) SKP aims at universalisation and qualitative improvement of primary education in remote, arid and socio-economically backward villages in Rajasthan with primary attention to girls. It is noteworthy that in Shiksha Karmi Schools, most of the students are from SCs, STs and OBCs. Kasturba Gandhi Balika Vidyalayas Under the scheme of Kasturba Gandhi Balika Vidyalayas, 750 residential schools are being set up in difficult areas with boarding facilities at elementary level for girls belonging predominantly to the SC, ST, OBC and minorities. The scheme would be applicable only in those identified Educationally Backward Blocks (EBBs) where, as per census data 2001, the rural female literacy is below the national average and gender gap in literacy is more than the national average. Among these blocks, schools may be set up in areas with concentration of tribal population, with low female literacy and/or a large number of girls out of school. www.ijmer.in
160
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Jan Shikshan Sansthan (JSS) The Scheme of JSS or Institute of People’s Education is a polyvalent or multifaceted adult education programme aimed at improving the vocational skill and quality of life of the beneficiaries. The objective of the scheme is education, vocational and occupational development of the socio-economically backward and educationally disadvantaged groups of urban/rural population particularly neoliterates, semi-illiterates, SCs, STs, women and girls, slum dwellers, migrant workers, etc. Literacy campaigns have had an enormous impact on other social sectors. The campaigns have served the cause of promoting equity and social justice in society and fostering of a scientific temper and a sense of belonging to India’s great composite culture and consciousness of unity in diversity. Mid-Day Meal scheme The Mid-Day Meal scheme is a successful incentive programme. It covers all students of primary classes in all government, local body and government aided schools in the country with the aim to improve enrolment, attendance and retention while simultaneously impacting on the nutritional status of the children. Introducing of this programme, dropouts have been reduced o some extent. Central Institute of Indian Languages (CIIL) The Central Institute of Indian Languages, Mysore has a scheme of development of Indian Languages through research, developing manpower and production of materials in modern Indian Languages including tribal languages. The Institute has worked in more than 90 tribal and border languages.
www.ijmer.in
161
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Kendriya Vidyalayas (KVs) 15 per cent and 7.5 per cent seats are reserved for SCs and STs respectively in fresh admissions. No tuition fee is charged from scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe students up to class XII. Navodaya Vidyalaya (NVs) Reservation of seats in favour of children belonging to SCs and STs is provided in proportion to their population in the concerned district provided that no such reservation will be less than the national average of 22.5 per cent (15 per cent for SCs and 7.50 per cent for STs) and a maximum of 50 per cent for both the categories (SCs & STs) taken together. These reservations are interchangeable and over and above the students selected under open merit. National Institute of Open Schooling (NIOS) Concession in fee to SC/ST candidates The SC/ST students are given concession in admission fees to the extent of Rs.450/- for Secondary Courses and Rs.525/- for Senior Secondary Courses. Under Facilities for Schools cent Organisations
the Scheme of strengthening of Boarding and Hostel Girls Students of Secondary and Higher Secondary per cent financial assistance is given to Voluntary to improve enrolment of adolescent girls belonging to
rural areas and weaker sections. Preference is given to educationally backward districts particularly those predominately inhabited by SCs/STs and educationally backward minorities. Out of 43,000 scholarships at the secondary stage for talented children from rural areas 13,000 scholarships are awarded to SC/ST students subject to fulfillment of criteria laid down.
www.ijmer.in
162
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
National Council for Educational Research and Training (NCERT) NCERT focuses on the development of textbooks, teacher guides, supplementary reading materials, evaluation of textbooks, vocational education, educational technology, examination reforms, support to Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan (SSA), education of educationally disadvantaged groups. NCERT operates the National Talent Search Scheme for pursuing courses in science and social science up to doctoral level and in professional courses like medicine and engineering up to seconddegree level subject to fulfillment of the conditions. Out of 1000 scholarships, 150 scholarships are reserved for SC students and 75 scholarships for ST students. National Institute of Educational Planning and Administration (NIEPA) Educational development of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes is an area of major concern of NIEPA (External website that opens in a new window). It carries out a number of studies relating to educational programmes and schemes for scheduled castes and scheduled tribes. It has also been generating material relating to educational institutions and development of Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe students. SCP & TSP From the allotted budgets of the Departments of Elementary Education and Literacy and Secondary and Higher Education, 16.20 and 8 per cent are allocated under the Special Component Plan (SCP) and the Tribal Sub-Plan (TSP) for Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes respectively. The Department of Secondary and Higher Education has earmarked notionally Rs.333.75 crore and 166.88 crore www.ijmer.in
163
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
for SCP and TSP respectively out of the plan outlay of Rs.2225 crore for Annual Plan 2004-05. Department of Elementary Education and Literacy has earmarked notionally Rs.900 crore and 450 crore for SCP and TSP respectively out of the plan outlay of Rs.6000 crore for Annual Plan 2004-05. Adult literacy schemes: Adult Literacy Schemes of the National Literacy Mission have been implemented in nearly all the districts of the country. Special measures have been initiated to improve female literacy in low female literacy districts (45) through focused interventions by Zilla Saksharata Samitis, Non-government Organisations, women volunteer teachers and Panchayati Raj functionaries. Emphasis is also being laid on provision of life-long learning opportunities, imparting vocational skills, and improving income generation of neo-literates through the Continuing Education Programme, which is being implemented in 272 districts. The achievements made in the literacy rates of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes are also significant compared to those in the 1991 Census, i.e. 37.41 per cent and 29.41 per cent respectively. Besides, the growth in female literacy amongst the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes is also at a faster rate as compared to male literacy figures. Enrolment of SC children in primary education The SSA has been promoting diverse strategies designed to enhance participation in elementary education of SC children. In addition to the strategies such as opening of neighbourhood schools, transportation, escort and residential facilities as per need, free textbooks and uniforms, Mid-Day Meal, curricular adaptation for inclusion, pedagogic reforms etc. that have been adopted to ensure increased participation of disadvantaged social groups, certain specific www.ijmer.in
164
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
intervention have been implemented to enhance participation of SC children in elementary education. The main thrust has been to develop context-specific interventions to tackle problems relating to participation of SC children in elementary education. Some of these specific strategies include: (i) providing adequate infrastructure for elementary schooling in districts with concentration of SC population; (ii) provision of financial assistance to each district for special innovative activities to promote education of SC children; (iii) programmes to sensitise teachers to promote equitable learning opportunities and to address issues relating to class discrimination; and (iv) statutory representation of SC members in Village Education Committees and School Management Committees. The SSA interventions have had a positive impact in terms of enhanced enrolment in elementary education of children belonging to Scheduled Castes during the past few years. Enrollment of SC children in primary education from 2001 to 2014 have been presented in Table 2.6 Table 2.6: Enrolment of SC children in primary Education (in Millions) Year
Boys
Girls
Total
2000-01
12.1
9.1
21.2
2001-02
12.3
9.3
21.5
2002-03
11.9
9.7
21.7
2003-04
12.8
10.4
23.1
2004-05
13.8
11
24.8
2005-06
14
11.3
25.3
2006-07
14.4
11.8
26.2
www.ijmer.in
165
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
2007-08
13.7
12.5
26.2
2008-09
13.8
12.7
26.5
2009-10
13.8
12.7
26.5
2010-11
14.1
13
27.1
2011-12
14.2
13.3
27.5
2012-13
14.1
13.2
27.3
2013-14
13.6
12.7
26.3
Source: National University of Educational Planning and Administration- Education For All: Towards Quality with Equity, 2011. As per Table 2.6 between 2000-01 and 2013-14, the enrolment of SC children in primary education increased by 5.1 million (from 21.2 million to 26.3 million). The enrolment of boys belonging to SC in primary education has increased by 1.5 million (from 12.1 million to 13.6 million, while the enrolment of girls increased by 3.6 million (from 9.1 million to 12.7 million) during this period (Figure 2.2.11). The total enrolment of SC children in primary education has increased by 24.1 per cent. The percentage increase in SC enrolment in primary education during the period 2000-01 to 2013-14 was higher for girls (39.6 per cent) than that for boys (12.4 per cent). Gross Enrolment of SC Children Ratios in Primary education Between 2000-01 and 2013-14, the Grass Enrolment Ratio Expend for SC children in primary, upper primary and elementary education have registered steady increase and is presented in Table 2.7.
www.ijmer.in
166
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Table 2.7: Gross Enrolment Ratios of SC Children at Primary Level (%) Year
Boys
Girls
Total
2000-01
107.3
85.8
96.8
2001-02
103.1
82.3
93
2002-03
101.4
89.4
95.6
2003-04
93.1
83
88.3
2004-05
123.3
106.6
115.3
2005-06
126.3
110.2
118.6
2006-07
131.6
115.4
123.8
2007-08
125.5
124.3
124.9
2008-09
130.2
130.1
130.1
2009-10
127.8
128.7
128.3
2010-11
131.3
132.7
132
2012-13
115.9
117.7
116.8
2013-14
112.1
114
113
Source:
National
University
of
Educational
Planning
and
Administration- Education For All: Towards Quality with Equity, 2011 It is clear from Table 2.7 that between 2000-01 and 2013-14, the Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) for SC children in primary education has increased by 16.2 percentage points (from 96.8 per cent to 113 per cent). The increase in GER was substantially higher for SC girls (28.2 percentage points) than that for SC boys (4.8 percentage points) during this period.
www.ijmer.in
167
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
SC children enrolled as percentage of total enrolment in elementary education During the year 2013-14, the number of SC children enrolled as percentage of total enrolment in elementary education was 19.72 per cent while the share of SC population in the total population was 16.6 per cent in 2011 (Census 2011). Girls constituted 48.46 per cent of the total SC children enrolled in elementary education during the year 2013-14 (U-DISE, NUEPA). The number of SC girls enrolled as percentage of total SC enrolment has increased from 47.76 per cent in 2007-08 to 48.76 per cent in 2013-14. Drop-out rates in primary and elementary education (SC students) During the period 2000-01 to 2008-09, the overall drop-out rate for SC students at primary stage (Classes I-V) declined by 18.5 percentage points. The over-all drop-out rate for SC students at the elementary stage (Classes I-VIII) declined by 12.8 percentage points during this period (chart 2.1).
Chart 2.1 Dropout Rates in Primary and Elementary Level (SC Students) 70
60.7
59.9
59.4
60 50
45.2
40
41.5
36.6
57.3
34.2
55.2
32.9
53.1 35.9
30
52.5
30.1
47.9 26.7
20 10 0 2001-02 2002-03 2003-04 2004-05 2005-06 2006-07 2007-08 2008-09 Primary
www.ijmer.in
Elemantary
168
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
A study commissioned by the Government of India on measuring student and teacher attendance in 2012-13 covering 27 states reported significant improvement in the average overall attendance with regard to both teachers and students in comparison with a similar study conducted in 2006-7, covering 23 States. The study indicated that the average student attendance at the primary stage increased from 68.5 per cent in 2006-07 to 76.2 per cent in 2012-13 while the average student attendance at the upper primary stage increased from 75.7 per cent in 2006-07 to 77.8 per cent in 2012-13. In the case of teachers, the overall attendance at the primary stage improved from 81.7 per cent to 84.3 per cent and from 80.5 per cent to 81.3 per cent at the upper primary stage during the period 2006-07 to 2012-13. Bibliography: ASER Institute (2009). Annual Status of Education Report ASER (Rural), Mumbai: Pratham India Education Initiative, p.7. Azzam, A.M., “ Why students drop out”. Educational Leadership, Vol.64, No.7, March 2007, pp. 91-93. Barsaga, E.B., “The holding power of the elementary education system in the Philippines”, Quezon City: Innotech, 1995. Bridgeland, J.M, Dilulio, J.J. & Morison, K.B., The silent epidemic, Civic Enterprises, New York:, 2006. Chand, Vijaya Sherry and Choudhary, Geeta Amin (2006). Shiksha Sangam: Innovations Under the Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan, Ravi J Matthai Centre for Educational Innovation, Indian Institute of Management, Ahmedabad, p.45. Doddasiddaiah N. and Prof. S.L. Hiremath “Socio Economic Profile of Scheduled Caste Students in Secondary Education-A Sociological Study” International Journal of Humanities and Social Science Invention, Vol. 2 Issue 11, November. 2013, PP.36-39. Dreze, Jean and Goyal, Aparajita (2003). "Future of Mid-Day Meals,” Economic and Political Weekly, 38(44), pp.4673-4674. Government of India (1966). Report of the Education Commission 1964-66: Education and National Development, New Delhi: Man, p.24. Gupta, V.S., “Literacy and Technology for Rural Development: Mutual Relationship”, Kurukshetra, October 2001, pp.26. www.ijmer.in
169
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Indian Education Commission, 1964-66, chaired by Prof P S Kothari, p.132. J.C.Joheri “The Constitution of India: A Politico-Legal Study,” sterling publishers, New Delhi, 1995, p.274. Jacob Aikara, “Scheduled Castes and Higher Education”, Dastane Ramechandra and Co. Poona, 1980, p.45. Jha, Jyotsna and Dhir Jhingran (2002): ‘Elementary Education for the Poorest and other Deprived Groups’, Centre for Policy Research, New Delhi, p.52. Jhingaran, Dhir (2003). "Universalization of Elementary Education, p.36. Joseph Benjamin, “Dalit and Higher Education in India” The Indian Journal of Political Science, Vol.LXIX, No.3, July-September, 2008, pp.627. Joseph Benjamin, “Dalit and Higher Education in India” The Indian Journal of Political Science, Vol.LXIX, No.3, July-September, 2008, p. 641. K.Sahoo and B.C.Das, “Primary Education in the Tribal Belt of Orissa”, in Govinda Chandra Rath (Ed) “Tribal Development in India: The Contemporary Debate”, Sage Publications, New Delhi, 2006, p.258. Kotwal, N.and Rani, S., “Causes of School Dropouts among Rural Girls in Kathua District”, Journal of Human Ecology, Vol.22, No.1, July 2007, pp. 57-59. M.Jainullvuddin, “A Comparative study of Primary and Secondary Education in Nandyal Municipality” Ph.D Thesis (unpublished) 2006, p.70. Madhu and S.ParanjaRe, “Uneven Distribution of Education in Maharastra: Rural-Urban under and Caste Inequalities”, Economic and Political Weekly, January 20, 2007, vol.XLII, No.3, p.213. Mandina Shadreck “School Based Factors and the Dropout Phenomenon: A Study of Zhomba Cluster Secondary Schools in Gokwe District of Zimbabwe” Journal of Educational and Social Research Vol. 3 (1) January 2013, pp.51-59. Mathur J.S., Jain S.P. & Rahim C.A., Rural youth from Primary Groups, Dropouts and Nonstudents, A study of four states, NIRD 1987. Mehta, Arun C (2005). Elementary Education in India: Progress towards UEE, Analytical Report, New Delhi: National Institute of Educational Planning and Administration Government Policies and Perspectives," In Naila Kabeer, Nambissan, Geetha B and Subrahmanian, Ramya (Eds.), Child Labour and the Right to Education in South Asia: Needs versus Rights, New Delhi: Sage Publications, p.24.
www.ijmer.in
170
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Mehta, Arun C (2008). "Elementary Education in India: Progress towards UEE," New Delhi: NUEPA., p.56. Midatala Rani and D.C. Nanjunda, op. cit, p.115. Mohsin, A.O., Aslam, M., & Bashir, F., “Causes of dropouts at the secondary level in the Barani areas of the Punjab: A case study of Rawalpindi district”, Journal of Applied Sciences, Vol.4, No.1; October 2004, pp.155- 158. Mujibul Hasan Siddiqui, “The Problems of School Drop Outs among Minorities with Special Reference to Muslims in India”, International Journal of Management and Social Sciences Research (IJMSSR) Vol. 2, No. 1, January , pp.50-55. Pradip Chouhan, “A study on literacy and educational attainment of Scheduled Castes Population in Maldah District of West Bengal, India”, Journal of Geography and Regional Planning. Vol. 6, No.1, February, 2013, pp. 19-30. Punelekar, S.P., School Drop-out among Harijan Children, Causes and Cure, Central Institute of Research & Training in Public Cooperation, New Delhi 1975. R.S.Tyagi, “Institutional Reforms in Educational Management – The issue sustainability”, Review of Development and Change, Vol.XI, No.1, January-June 2006, p.34. Ramachandran, Vimala (2010). Gender Issues in Higher Education - Advocacy Brief. Bangkok: UNESCO Asia and Pacific Regional Bureau for Education, p.11. Rani, U.R., “Reasons For Rising School Dropout Rates Of Rural Girls In IndiaAn Analysis Using Soft Computing Approach”, International Journal of Current Research, Vol.3, No.9, January 2011, pp.140-143 Rupon Basumatary, “School Dropout across Indian States and UTs: An Econometric Study”, International Research Journal of Social Sciences, Vol. 1, No.4, December 2012, pp. 28-35. S.K.Nanda, “Indian Education and It’s Problems Today”, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi, 1991, p.15. Sarkar, B.K., A plot investigation of School Drop-out Reasons, Demography Research Unit, ISI, Calcutta, 1980. Sawalia Bihari Verma, “Role of Education for Economic Development and Social Transformation”, in Sawalia Bihari Verma and Dinesh Kumar Verma (Eds) “Strategy for Promoting Rural Infrastructure”, Pointer Publishers, Jaipur 2004, pp.118. School drop-out: Poverty and patterns of exclusion (2012), South African Child Gauge 2008/2009. Retrieved April, 20, 2013 from http://ci.org.za/depts/ci /pubs/pdf/g eneral/gauge 2008/part_ two/exclusion.pdf., 46-49. www.ijmer.in
171
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Shah M.R.,A study of incidence and factors responsible for dropping out of children from municipal and local authority schools in Greater Bombay and Thana Districts from standard I to VIII during the last four year i.e. 1973, 1974, 1977, 1983,NCBRT, Finance, 1983. Shrivastava S, & Gupta S.P., Survey of the non-enrolled, non-attending and dropout children of the age group 6.14 in the Ferozepur District, Dev Samak College of Education for women, Ferozpur, (Planning Commission Finance,1980. Srivastava, Ravi (2005). "Public Expenditure in Elementary Education,” In Mehrotra, S; Panchmukhi, PR; Srivastava, S and Srivastava, R (Eds.), Universalizing Elementary Education in India, New Delhi: Oxford University Press, p.59. Suresh Mishra, “Education for the Masses: Lessons from Gandhian praxis”, Anasakti Darshan, Vol.3, No.2, July-December 2007, p.109. The 'plan' component of the spending denotes expenditure on new schemes and programmes, while 'non-plan' spending represents spending of recurring nature on schemes and programmes initiated earlier. Tilak, J.B.G. (1996). How Free is Free Primary Education in India? Economic and Political Weekly, 31(5- 6):275-82; p.355. Times of India, April, 18, 2013. Times of India, April, 18, 2013. Times of India, April, 18, 2013. UNESCO (2008). A View inside Primary Schools: A World Education Indicators Cross-national Study, Montreal: UNESCO Institute for Statistics, p.28. Velaskar, Padma (2004). Structural Inequalities and Education Inequalities: The Case of Dalits of Maharashtra, Paper presented at a Seminar on ‘Towards Quality Education for All: Issues and Challenges Beyond 86th Amendment’, Council for Social Development, New Delhi, p.18. World Bank (2004). Attaining the Millennium Development Goals in India: Role of Public Policy and Service Delivery, Human Development Unit, South Asian Region, June, p.13.
www.ijmer.in
172
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
INFLUENCE OF MIND MAPPING AS A STRATEGY IN TEACHING IX STANDARD GEOGRAPHY OF SOCIAL SCIENCES V. Ramakrishna Assistant Professor University College of Education Adikavi Nannaya University Rajahmundry Social sciences being an important and compulsory subject taught in secondary school according to Secondary education commission (195253). The quality of Social sciences education should be made accessible to all the children. NCF-2005 has viewed children as active constructors of knowledge and strictly advocates the use of various types of methods, activities and strategy to help students construct their own knowledge. Mind mapping is one of the innovative teaching strategies that can clarify, and deepen students understanding of the Geography content. Mind mapping skill is an enabling skill to enhance the development of students' thinking skills through more meaningful learning activities. The study was undertaken with the Objective of studying the influence of Mind Mapping as a teaching strategy in attainment of geography content and development of Mind 7..n.9pping skill and to study the differences in between girls and 'boys attainment of geography content and development of Mind mapping skill among IX standard students. The study is pre-test, Post-test quasi-experimental study. The study revealed that Mind mapping as a teaching strategy is influence in attainment of IX standard geography content and developing Mind mapping skill. Findings of the study are in agreement with the findings of several studies conducted earlier. INTRODUCTION:Social science plays an important role in school learning and also assumes a prominent position in modern education and www.ijmer.in
173
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
curriculum. Social science is the essence of present curriculum. It is a science of moral, spiritual, social, ethical, and intellectual thinking and systematic behavior. Social science is taught on a compulsory basis to all pupils as a part of general education during the first ten years of school study. Study of Social sciences provides intellectual stimulation and makes a person efficient in coping with the demands of the qualitative aspects of their day-today life. Geography is one of the branches of Social sciences and is concerned with space and earth which forms the basis of all things that exist. Understanding geography is necessary in understanding how the world is built. Geography holds an important place in the Social sciences curriculum. We need to learn about atmosphere as a part of our everyday life because which very important living element on the earth. We need geography to understand the physical world and develop the awareness about the surroundings or environment. The implication of this mind mapping process is that the students can understand equatorial system and theories of forms of universe properly. Social sciences in general and geography in particular should be carefully imparted in different levels of school education through the pedagogy of Social sciences. Teachers should use various methods, techniques and strategy for making teaching and learning of Social sciences influence. It should be need bring major reforms in teaching and learning process. Teachers can focus on educating and improving the quality and values of teaching of Social sciences. MIND MAPPING A mind map is a diagram used to visually organize information. A mind map is often created a round a single concept, drawn as an image in the center of a blank landscape page, to which associated representations of ideas such as images, words and parts of words are www.ijmer.in
174
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
added. Graphical technique for visualizing connection between several ideas or pieces of information Each idea or fact is written down and then linked by lines or curves to its major or minor (or following or previous) idea or fact, thus creating a web of relationship. Mind Maps were popularized by author and consultant, Tony Buzan. They use a two-dimensional structure, instead of the list format conventionally used to take notes. Mind mapping is used in note taking, brain storming, problem solving and project planning like other mapping techniques its purpose is to focus attention, and to capture and frame knowledge to facilitate sharing of ideas and concepts. Mind mapping is one of the innovative teaching strategies that can clarify and deepen students understanding of the geography content. Mind mapping skill is an enabling skill to enhance the development of students' thinking skills, understanding ability through more meaningful learning activities. Mind mapping skill once learned can help students to understand, what they know and think in more systematic and meaningful ways. Mind maps are creates interest and sequential representation of concepts and their relationships that are intended to represent the knowledge constructing that human beings store in their minds. When the teacher used the mind mapping as systematic in teaching social sciences, the students can be acquired much more knowledge of the geography. NEED AND IMPORTANCE OF THE STUDY:National Curriculum Framework-2005 (NCF-2005) recommends teaching for construction of knowledge. In the constructive perspective, learning is a process of construction of knowledge. Learners actively construct their own knowledge by connecting new ideas to existing ideas on the basis of pictures or activities presented to them. The structuring and restructuring of ideas are essential features as the learner progresses in learning. It has significant implications for teaching and learning of Social sciences. www.ijmer.in
175
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Universalization of schooling also has important implications for Social sciences teaching. Social sciences being such an important and compulsory subject, quality Social sciences education should be made accessible to all the children. NCF-2005 has viewed children as active constructors of knowledge and strictly advocates the use of various types of methods, activities and strategy to help students construct their own knowledge. In Mind mapping pictures to be learned becomes conceptually very clear. For learning to take place, students have to actively involve themselves in learning. In this background the researcher has made an attempt to study the influence of Mind mapping as a teaching strategy for teaching and learning IX standard geography of social sciences. OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY:1. To study the influence of Mind mapping as a strategy in attainment of geography Content of IX standard students. 2. To study the influence of Mind mapping as a strategy for studying the Mind mapping Skill of IX standard students in learning geography. 3. To study constructing knowledge of geography content among IX standard students As a result of learning through Mind mapping as a teaching strategy. 4. To study new strategy of IX standard students in Mind mapping skill in representing Geography content. HYPOTHESES:1. Mind mapping as a teaching strategy is influence in attainment of IX standard geography. 2. Mind mapping as a teaching strategy is influence in developing Mind mapping skill in Geography of IX standard students. www.ijmer.in
176
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
3. Mind mapping as a teaching strategy has no differential effect in both boys and girls Development of Mind mapping skill in geography of IX standard students. VARIABLES OF THE STUDY:Independent and Dependent variables in the study are: 1. Independent variable -Mind mapping as a teaching strategy in learning geography and 2. Students, Dependent variables in the study are: 'I .Attainment of geography content And development of Mind mapping skill. METHOOLOGY:The present study is pre-test, Post-test quasi-experimental study. Study consisted of two groups, one experimental and other control group. The experimental group was taught using Mind mapping as a teaching strategy involving the development of Mind maps along with other supporting pictures to teach and the other group was taught by traditional method. Sample:The investigator restricted his study to only one school. Investigator selected Z.P. high school Kakinada. Full of students of very low income group investigator took all the students of class IX (60) as the sample for his study. The investigator classified the entire class in to two identical groups based on the scores of pre-test. The Sample of 60 (30 Experimental group) and (30 Control group) IX standard students were selected following purposive sampling technique.
www.ijmer.in
177
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Strategy:Achievement test was developed to measure the pre-requisite knowledge of the students related to the content considered for developing teaching learning pictures using Mind mapping as a teaching strategy and for traditional teaching. Mind mapping test was developed to measure the Mind mapping strategy with the students. Achievement test and Mind mapping test (based on IX standard geography) both are pre-tests and administered to both experimental and control group students. One more achievement test was constructed to measure the attainment of IX standard geography content and Mind mapping test to measure the development of Mind mapping skill of the both group students. Both these tests were post tests and administered to both the groups and constructed based on the IX standard selected geography lessons. PROCEDURE:In the first part strategy was developed and lesson plans were prepared for teaching the IX standard geography lessons especially theories of planets using Mind mapping as a teaching strategy for teaching experimental group students. For teaching control group student’s lesson plans were prepared to teach the same units of IX standard geography for same number of periods. For teaching experimental group students Mind maps were developed for every lesson as well as for the entire units as a part of teaching. In the second part achievement test is constructed based on IX standard geography to measure the pre-requisite knowledge with the students and Mind mapping test to study the Mind mapping skill with the students. These tests were administered (mean) marks obtained by students on pre-tests of both the groups of IX standard were calculated. Significant difference between the means of these two groups or
www.ijmer.in
178
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Sections on both the tests were calculated. Differences between the means on both the pre-tests (achievement test’t’ value is 8.62 and Mind mapping test’t’ value is 0.751) were not significant at 0.05 levels. Hence both groups were considered as matched groups. Then one group was randomly selected as experimental group and other group as control group. Then both the group students were taught for 20 days (each day one period of 45 minutes duration). Control group students were taught using traditional method and experimental group students were taught using Mind mapping as a strategy for teaching. After the intervention achievement test constructed based on the IX standard geography contents selected for teaching to both the groups and Mind mapping test to study the development Mind mapping skill on the same geography contents were administered to both the group students. Necessary data were collected to study the influence of Mind mapping as a teaching strategy and data was analysed using test. ANALYSIS OF RESULTS:Analysis of the data revealed that Mind mapping as a teaching strategy is influence in attainment of IX standard geography content. The findings of the study revealed that Mind mapping as a teaching strategy significantly ('e value-16.34) improves the attainment of IX standard geography content. The findings ('t' value-21.22) of the study revealed that Mind mapping as a teaching strategy is influence in developing Mind mapping skill among IX standard students while learning geography content. In the beginning students were finding it difficult to represent the concepts, themes generalizations of geography. Gradually they have developed Mind mapping skill for the given data i.e. they were able to give proper examples, easy grasping and got explanation ability.
www.ijmer.in
179
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
FINDINGS:1. The performance of total students in post test after using mind mapping strategy is found to Be 31.35% more than the performance of entire students in the pre-test. 2. The performance of experimental group is 65% more than performance of students in Controlled group post test. 3. The performance of post test experimental group is 50% more than the performance of Students in controlled group post test. 4. The number of students who crossed the average mark of 50% is less in number in pre-test After being exposed to traditional teaching. The number of students who crossed the average Marks of 50 are high in experimental group after being exposed mind mapping. CONCLUSION:An Investigation may be attempted to make a detailed study of attainment of minimum levels of learning among students. In conclusion it can be said that Mind mapping as a teaching strategy is influence in improving the achievement of IX standard student geography content and Mind mapping skill. Mind Mapping is an extremely effective method of taking notes. Not only do Mind Maps show facts, they also show the overall structure of a subject and the relative importance of individual parts of it. They help you to associate ideas, think creatively, and make connections that you might not otherwise make. It is very useful to the teachers of all subjects and students. REFERENCES:1. Dr. Chayya .M.P — Effective teaching strategies and innovation education — Alpha publication Delhi.
www.ijmer.in
180
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
2. BEST JOHN. W & ETAL-"Research in education" prentice hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 3. NCERT (2005) National Curriculum Framework, Author, New Delhi. 4. Novak, J.D. (1998) Learning, Creating and Using Knowledge concept Map Facilitative. 5. Strategies NJ.
in Schools and Corporations. Erlbaum, Mahwah,
6. Secondary education commission (1952-53). 7.
D'Antoni, A.V., Zipp, G.P. (2006). "Applications of the Mind Map Learning Technique in Chiropractic Education: A Pilot Study and Literature".
8. Buzan, Tony 1974. Use your head. London: BBC Books.
www.ijmer.in
181
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
FACETS OF SOCIAL WORK WITH CHANGING FACES: TOWARDS INDIGENOUS VISIBILITY Venkatesha Murthy. S Ph.D Research Scholar Department of Social Work Sri Krishnaevaraya University Anantapur Abstract Social workers, themselves, reflect many different faces. Social work has evolved as an established profession that has the capacity to address both individual and social issues. Social work has successfully expanded its knowledge base, increasingly engages in evidence-based practice. In addition, we are proud that social work has become a recognized profession throughout the world, adding the ability to apply social work knowledge and skills to issues of Indian importance providing these important services. Days are gone when social work or social service was associated with charity, but today it is considered that all human beings have equal rights. Social work has emerged as a promising career in recent times. Serious professional attitude has replaced the casual approach that was attached with social work. It is the need of the hour to design the Indigenous literature for both social work theory and practice with regard to the application of all methods of social work for resolving the problems of individual, groups and community from Indian perspectives. Indeed, social work is an umbrella term that covers a diverse set of practice activities. The key feature of the paper is to give an overview of the various dimensions of changing faces of social work from indigenous perspectives. Introduction India is a country of villages. Indian ruralites have been maintaining the culture and have created a way to the people for their happy and peaceful life. The personal, familial, social and occupational www.ijmer.in
182
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
problems of the members are also resolved in the process. In short, the responsibilities of the family members are accepted and the social duty is performed by them sincerely, honestly with love and affection. However, industrialization, urbanization, westernization, technological development and globalization bringing changes in the rural society in India today. Social Work Education has witnessed many milestone changes in its form and content. Even today, there is no basic text book on the Indian Social Work which takes into consideration indigenous elements of social, economic and political life. The clients of social workers might be anyone, ranging from individuals to families to corporations and even to whole communities. Thus, social workers tend to focus their efforts more on the poor than the rich, on the ill and disabled over the healthy, on those who experience discrimination over those who have the privilege of enjoying the full opportunities offered by the society. Social workers, themselves, reflect many different faces. The provisions of services in India for the needy with social work touch require indigenous approach in the present scenario. Relevance of Indigenous Social Work in Indian Context In India the Gram Panchayats administer the respective villages in a conventional style. It provides civic facilities and amenities to the villagers. Gram panchayat is known as a self-govt. and this self-govt. provides services to the people such as peace, security, and settlement of disputes, conflicts, justice, and welfare service. This self-Govt. is known as a base of the villagers. Higher caste and rich class people use to dominate over the administration of panchayat for several years. But social laws have been amended today due to which the lower caste and class people are able to get an opportunity to work with them in top position. Thus, the down-trodden people are ruling today in the villages. The women too are getting elected on the bodies. However, the
www.ijmer.in
183
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
real change in terms of values has not taken place because these elected members and the authorities are not able to play their roles. The sociologists and the social workers have failed to study this aspect to introduce modernization in administration. Normally, the elected members of panchayat may be educated or uneducated and inexperienced. They are not well versed with their roles and functions, laws, rules and regulations, office methods and procedures and objectives of the schemes and projects. The government or the educational institutions have not developed any education and training to the elected persons from social work or sociological perspectives. The legal, technical and social hindrances are seen in the expected development. For enabling the ruralites to play their social roles in the process of social development, their preparation is expected but for their effective presentation, the social work and sociological training is expected. In gram panchayat system, various positions have been created such as Village Accountant, Gramsevak, Patel, and they are expected to function professionally. Their roles are social development orientated. Hence, social, philosophical, legal, practical, welfare orientation is expected. Indigenous Social Work: Lack of Literature Social Work in India needs immediate attention is the inability to sufficiently indigenize its knowledge-base. The basic teaching material with respect to interventionist methods (the holy trinity of social case work, social group work and community organization) is still primarily American. There is often a lingering doubt in the mind of many social work educators and trained social workers whether social work in India can afford to be only concerned with specific individuals, groups and communities when the problems are really the problems of large masses of people (Gore, 2011). Since social work literature, modes of practice, approaches, theories, have been heavily borrowed from
www.ijmer.in
184
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
western countries, so we need to develop the indigenous approaches too. This requires that the academicians and practitioners must document their experiences so as to facilitate the process of developing indigenous approaches (Thomas: 2010) Indigenous Social Work and Syllabus of Theory and Practice The syllabus containing certain papers of social work is not that sound. The papers such as History and Philosophy, Methods of Social work, Case work, Group work, Community Organization, Social Work Research have been incorporated along with the background papers from the western perspectives. The papers such as social welfare administration and social action have either been incorporated fully or partially. In fact, the social work techniques are known as speciality of social work education. Naturally, all the six techniques are required to be incorporated in theoretical and practical syllabus but the experts of the university have neglected conveniently and weakened the course. Resultantly, students have failed to make difference between professional social work and social services. Due to which the profession has failed measurably to develop its own speciality of professional services. Students are also expected to study the social reformation, cultural changes, usage of the available techniques from the Indigenous approach, but this most important aspects have not been incorporated in social work education. Due to which they have failed to understand the social structure, social system and socio-philosophical and cultural life of the people. The indigenous social work make the students feel easy and comfortable in understanding the theory and practice better. Practically, students’ skills in theories, presentation, conceptual clarity, paper presentation, discussions, and interactions can be enhanced in this way.
www.ijmer.in
185
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Framework of Fieldwork Syllabus from Indigenous Approach Theoretical study and practice of social work techniques is the speciality of social work profession and this speciality is neglected in terms of framing the syllabus, covering all the techniques for education, training and practice. The reason is unknown to the professionals as well as to the non-professionals. These techniques are devised and designed in America. Naturally, the influence of American culture and values is seen on these techniques. But they are suitable, acceptable, practical and beneficial to any human society of the world provided the necessary professional skills are developed for their practicability. This aspect seems to be totally neglected in terms of emphasizing on framing the fieldwork syllabus. In fact, Indian culture and values are altogether different from other cultures of the world. All the social work educators are aware and having sound knowledge about it. In this, typical Indian culture, values, traditions, customs, usages, practice, understanding, mentality etc, the indirect techniques i.e. social work research, social welfare administration and social action are the most suitable along with the direct techniques i.e. Case work, Group work and Community Organization. However, the care is not taken to frame the fieldwork syllabus in all these six techniques of social work. Negligence in this regard has definitely affected on the quality of training and practice and this has affected on the recognition, approval, utility, results, leadership, status, respect etc. The professionals are undergoing training under the untrained voluntary professionals. Indigenous social work is failure today because the course itself is not designed properly and its fields and areas have not been developed considering the needs of the people and the professional approaches. Hence, the counter parts have captured and dominated the social service field. Today, the parallel professions have entered in this field and that has created competitions and challenges to Indigenous social work. This is the time now to be dynamic for its www.ijmer.in
186
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
existence and survival. Fieldwork in specialized area should also be professional in nature and structure. That is why one can easily observe that the professional indigenous social work is not at all visible or vivid in the rural parts. On the contrary, the counter parts ordinary social services have been deeply rooted in the soil and people recognize the same. There are no foot prints of professional social work in rural areas. Fieldwork training in all the social subjects and aspects can enhance its utility value. It may definitely get recognition and deeply route in the soil and dominate over the social service fields and make the profession as master in the field. However, such indigenous fieldwork training is not developed by the social work educators in India. Making and keeping the profession in ordinary status and also in under utilization position is definitely academic crime. (Subhedar, I.S, 2011) Professional Indigenous Social Work Practice Social work profession is very vast and acceptable to different fields and organizations but the schools of social work and the social work educators have fallen short in achieving the professional target. The trained social workers are perfectly suitable in the jobs. In other words, right men for right places in the govt. private and co-operative sectors. However, the university system or schools of social work have failed to create such professional jobs and job descriptions, roles and social work functions, subjects, aspects, to be dealt with, and the probable results and efforts have also not taken to develop the professional employment and fields. Resultantly, the trained social workers are seen accepting any kind of jobs in any fields for their survival. This is how the social work profession is under estimated and underutilized. Neither professionals nor the University authorities have taken care for the same.
www.ijmer.in
187
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
In fact, rural area is very vast and there is a tremendous scope for self-employment and social work practice but unfortunately, the universities and the schools of social work have failed to impart training to set up the professional NGOs and also to design the developmental field projects. Govt. of India has also designed number of different field project and schemes but such training is also not imparted to the students. Hence, the students are not trained for field practices and also for creating their own world of social work. The said field is known as a profession but these professionals are seen undergoing training under the non-trained professionals. The trained social workers can design projects on each and every social problem and render preventive, curative and rehabilitative services. Social work professionals have to plan about the utilization of the expertized services. It is to promote the fact that western social workers have as much to learn from Indigenous social workers and social workers from non western cultures, as they have to learn from other western social workers. Thus, for example, the lessons learned in Indigenous contexts have application in western contexts as well, especially in situations in which social workers are dealing with diversity. We want to address the imbalance in the literature on cross culturalism that is largely directed towards western social workers practising within culturally diverse client communities in western contexts where it embraces many of the ideas of antiracist and anti- oppressive practice. Social workers have much to learn from one another’s work and each has implications for the other. Indigenous approaches remind us of our humanistic goals and the importance, first and foremost, of connecting with the client. Social work 'being a Jill of all trades but mistress of none'. The future of the profession depends on the professional skill existing and potential in the coming days. Social work education should gear itself to become more focussed, more diversified at different levels and areas www.ijmer.in
188
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
and more result oriented in character to meet the new challenges. (Siddiqui H.Y, 2010). In the current situation social work is flying high at global level. It is very essential that the social work profession has come out with new and effective ideas to intervene emerging issues. ‘Social Workers are limited in their response to macro-level issues and interventions, thus social activism low among social workers. It is also fact that many known social activists have not been trained by the social work institutions’. (Desai Murali and Narayanan Lata, 1988). Social Work profession emerged in the western world, in particular the U.S.A and the United Kingdom, at the turn of the 20th century (Kendall, 1995; Midgley, 1981). The efforts indigenisation of social work knowledge varied in different parts of the world (Healy L.M., 2001; Nagpaul, 1993). Gangabhushan M. Molankal (2012) pointed out that Lack of in-depth indigenous study material based upon Indian culture and society has further complicated the applicability of the professional social work as taught in the existing schools of social work. If social work has to move toward professionalism in any society and has to become effective, it must have indigenous foundations incorporating dominant cultural philosophies, on the one hand, and projected goals which are being promoted on the other hand. The Many Facets of Social Work The social work education should gear itself to become more focussed, more diversified at different levels and areas and more result oriented in character to meet the new challenges. Social workers practice not only in the traditional social service agency, but also in elementary schools; in the military; in business, factories, and offices, in federal, state, and local government agencies and legislative bodies; in private practice as individual, family, and marriage therapists; in hospitals and in mental health facilities; in courts and correctional settings; in home health care; and in services to the elderly. In fact
www.ijmer.in
189
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
social workers can be found anywhere and everywhere there are people who need the help of a professional to alleviate personal or social problems. Facets
of
Social
Work
in
India:
Common
Skills
and
Responsibilities of a Social Worker The following skills and responsibilities are to be adopted by a social worker in dealing with various facets social work in India. 1. Advocate for individual clients or the community on identified problems. 2. Serve as a broker by connecting individual with resources. 3. Create and maintain professional helping relationships. 4. Improve problem-solving, coping, and development capacities of all people. 5. Be able to engage and communicate with diverse population and groups of all sizes. 6. Have a knowledge and understanding of human relationships. 7. Provide services to not only support change in the individual but also in his/her environment as well. Social Work Intervention with Families Social Workers who have mastered the methods and techniques received from the west may find themselves to be inadequately equipped to deal with the kind of problems that the families are confronting with. The type of intervention is needed now highly technical but humane, not specialised but integrated, not caste oriented but group and community oriented. The intervention techniques that the social worker in India need to develop and adopt to deal with the issues emanating from the changing trends the family derives. (M.L.P.Raju, and G.R.Krishna, 1996) www.ijmer.in
190
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Social Work Intervention with Children Professional social workers play an important role in working with child labourers; using the skills and methods of social work for education them, changing their attitudes and behaviour, giving them informal and formal education, vocational training and finally rehabilitating them. They can also work in collaboration with voluntary organisations for the rehabilitation of child workers. Social workers could be proficient in dealing with educational programmes and mobilizing the community, to take collective action for fulfilling the recognised needs of the children. This implies involving the community in all stages right from planning the programme to implement and evaluate it. (Government of India, 1987). Social workers play crucial role in the prevention of child trafficking using their knowledge and skills. The schools of social work in India need to incorporate child protection, trafficking prevention and intervention into curriculum and field work. (Bedi, Kiran and Nair, P.M, 2008)
their
Social Work Intervention with Elderly The aged were respected not only because they owned properties and assets but also due to the existence of socio-cultural values and traditional institutions that favoured them (Sonar, 2004). During their old age and unable conditions, the associations and institutions like joint family, kin groups, caste group, religion, village panchayat and traditional ethos have made the younger to have an unquestionable regard towards the aged. Hence, they were comfortable, respectable, creative and socially useful. As a result of materialistic approach, younger generations not only neglect but also clash with the aged, undermine them most of the time, and leave them behind to find themselves. Thus the life of elderly has become most vulnerable. Due to decline in birth rate and fewer children in the families, there will be lesser people to take care of the elderly in the coming years. Therefore,
www.ijmer.in
191
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
there is an increasing need of interventions with the elderly. Development is not possible unless the weaker sections of the society develop. It is to be noted that the elderly is one of the major components of weaker sections of society in developing countries like India (Sonar, 2004). Social Work Intervention with Psychiatric Social Work Psychiatric Social Work encompasses the entire gamut of mental health and neuro sciences, including inpatient and outpatient services, child and adolescent mental health, family psychiatric services, psychiatric/neurological/neurosurgical units, community extension service clinics and de addiction services. In India, psychiatric social workers extend their support in terms of psycho education, counselling, psychosocial interventions at individual and family level (Sekar, 2007). National Institute of Mental Health and Neuro Sciences (NIMHANS) has developed several manuals on providing psychosocial support during the disasters. This even has led to the development of guidelines for psychosocial support and mental health services by National Disaster Management Authority (NDMA 2010). School Mental Health is one of the areas where Psychiatric Social Workers have wider scope of work. The Psychiatric social workers role begins from the early identification, referral and interventions for childhood mental disorders, developmental disorders, sensitization of teachers and parents on the same, to the promotion of mental health in schools through school enrichment programmes, Life Skill Education and stress management programs for the staff and others. Working with children in difficult circumstances, geriatric population, people with HIV/AIDS, patients with severe physical health problems like cancer, socially excluded groups such as transgender; people with sexual orientation disorders, commercial sex workers can
www.ijmer.in
192
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
explore more avenues as these are some of the areas that require the expertise of psychiatric social workers. Social Work Intervention with HIV/AIDS Social Workers possess the knowledge and skills to work effectively with individuals who are living with HIV/AIDS and those affected by the disease, including family members, friends, partners and children. Social Workers strive to eradicate social exclusion and poverty across all fields of practice. Non-Government Organisations are an integral partner in the scaling up of HIV/AIDS interventions by promoting greater community partnership and ownership. The trained social workers are involved in all aspects of HIV/AIDS control, including education, counselling, treatment and social support, especially among high risk groups and school children through the school AIDS Education Programme (NACO, 2005) Social Work Intervention with Rural Community Development Indian social problems are seen ruining the life of the poor villagers. Slowly and steadily the seriousness is increasing in the rural society but the solution process has not been introduced and developed till today. Some problems are solved in the social system. However, the general social problems have influenced over the rural people negatively. For Example: Illiteracy, ignorance, superstition, untouchability, unemployment, poverty, crime, corruption, communal riots, Gundaism, indebtedness, habits, dowry,- family disputes, old-age / elderly persons problems, wife beating, In-laws torture, good-bad occasions, conflict, Hindu Muslim conflict etc. It is expected that these problems are to be resolved geographically but no attempts have been made by any one. Hence, the development of the real rural life has not taken place. Certain rural problems i.e. Family conflicts, Quarrellings, Husband-wife disputes, In-laws disputes, property, material problems, www.ijmer.in
193
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
etc were / are resolved at individual level or at conventional institutional level with the help of the traditional methods, i.e. social pressure, social boycott, social threatening, making social loss etc. but the system for resolving these problems from geographical perspectives scientifically has not been developed. These age-old techniques are out dated today. New techniques have to be accepted for the purpose. It is a need of the rural community in this changing society. Hence, there is no alternative to social work profession. In developing countries like India, social workers are also primarily engaged in remedial practice but their interventions often focus on the material needs of their clients. Today,
youth
organizations,
women’s
organizations,
co-
operative societies, primary health centres and such other organizations are seen functioning in almost all the villages but these organizations are not seen functioning according to their objectives. Because there is no system in existence for imparting them education and training. In fact, social work training is required to be imparted to make them professional. Attention of the professionals or any other persons has not been focused towards them. For rural development, different government, non-government, semi-government organizations are available but for utilizing them the professional knowledge is required. In short, no govt. mechanism is in a position to focus its attention towards the rural life. The people’s participation, SHGs and NGOs could very well be followed in every way of the developmental requirements of the Indian rural societies which can be ensured through social work practices by the professional social work force. (Somashekharappa, C.A, 2010) Social Work and Human Rights Social Work originates variously from humanitarian and democratic ideals. “Social Work is a profession whose purpose is to
www.ijmer.in
194
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
bring about social changes in society in general and in its individual forms of development” (IFSW,1982).The human rights movement is founded on a fundamental respect for the dignity and worth of every human being (Healy,2008). Humanitarian philosophy i.e. the respect for human dignity and worth of every individual occupies a central position in social work practice. Indigenous people around the world continue to live in hardship and danger due to the failure of states to recognise and uphold their human rights. Social work associations’ need to work with local, regional and national bureaucracies or power structures for promoting, developing and implementing needed changed in policy, planning and programming on human rights issues. Social Work and Sustainable Development Social Work literature, education, practice and research have started responding to the need of integrating the component of sustainable development in all the social work initiatives. Professional Social Work with its vast knowledge and skill base, professional networks and genuine commitment to the betterment of human condition has already started responding to the larger issues of global sustainability. People-Centred Development is the key factor in sustainable development based on the conviction that the local solutions must be congruent with local geographical and human resource realities at the time (Cox.1993). Indigenous knowledge interlinks and establishes a holistic relationship between man and nature. Social Work and Mass Media The application of social work practice, theory, research and policy to media production reflects a little-explored potential modality for micro and macro intervention, and thus is an innovation in the field, combining service learning, inter-disciplinary collaboration and application of social work knowledge through technology. Social www.ijmer.in
195
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Workers should become competent in using media to harness their power for intervention with and on behalf of clients, and to positively and actively shape the way clients and social work profession are portrayed and viewed in the larger world. Social Workers must become more media-friendly if they are to improve the profession’s public image,
campaigner
(Carole
Zuffery,
2008)
in
the
news
and
entertainment media as these images are thought to affect public support for programs, service utilisation, worker morale, and its ability to attract and retain new professionals (Kauffman & Raymond, 1996). Aldridge (1994) concedes that social work press is not uniformly negative, and that positive coverage of social work does occur, especially in local media. Social Work educators need to help students understand the structures, practices, and motivations behind various media if social workers hope to reshape attitudes and increase public knowledge of the profession (Tower, 2000). Social work educators need to facilitate the development of essential skills such as the ability to draft a press release, ability to identify when a press conference might be an effective promotional device and the ability to achieve all of the aforementioned without using annoying professional jargon (Neate & Philpot, as cited in Franklin, 1998). Social Work in Industry Industrial social work is one of the area in which the social worker extend their skill and expertness in helping personnel managers in the industry directly and organisational development indirectly, by intervening the employee management. It is essential to understand the areas of responsibilities associated with each functionary, so as to gain a clear perspective of role and status of the industrial social worker. The development of the industrial social work in India is recent. It is primarily voluntary and is influenced by the emphasis placed by the government on certain programmes in organized sector. The industrial social worker with his basic knowledge of human www.ijmer.in
196
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
dynamics and his/her skill in working with individuals at different levels will be a great asset in individualization service. The industrial social worker has to project his or her helper/moderator/facilitator rather than management
role as appointed
person. The transformation from industrial social work to corporate social responsibility points out a definite shift in the realm of social work vis-á-vis goal, objective and priorities of business. Social work in industry is a very important profession in the provision of social services, whether it is prevention, healing and development. A trained social worker, by using an integrated approach dwelling on his knowledge of human behaviour and human relationships and applying the various social work skills and techniques, can tackle human problems in industrial setting in a successful manner (Rameshwaridevi et.al, 2001) Indigenous Social Work Profession: Towards Better VisibilityEmerging Trends in the Era of Liberalization, Privatization and Globalization 1. Bringing new systems and structures resulting in restructuring of government departments as per the emerging trends at the global level. There is a need for internalising its intensions and implications. 2. Bringing new set of values and ethics unfavourable to the Indian context. 3. New opportunities with good package along with unhealthy and cut throat competition resulting in creating a wide gap between rich and the poor. 4. Demanding new types of skills redefines the job tasks demanding quick results; have to fulfil expectations of management ignoring the interests of people. What should be strategies that need to be adopted shall be evolved. www.ijmer.in
197
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
5. Introduction of capitalist and consumerist concept of renewal is diluting welfare and development concepts enshrined in the constitution of India. 6. Vulnerable sections are further marginalised, wide spread displacement of these communities are common. How to relate these issues and what course of action that we can look at. 7. Public sector industries are being privatised, opportunities in these are minimal. Even existing industries opt for other disciplines than professional social workers. Need for collective intervention in this regard is the need of the hour. 8. Private Sector Undertakings are increasing; opportunities are more and recruitment of social workers as HR managers on very meagre salary. Need for holding consultations with concerned. 9. The basic values, ethics, sentiments, human relationships etc have been ignored. Steps are to be taken to retain the bondage and cultural heritage. 10. People have increasingly becoming materialistic and selfish; Proper orientation and awareness need to be given to uphold the indigenous culture. Course of Action to meet the Challenges 1. Create Job opportunities for thousands of social workers released from the Universities and Colleges. Discussions and negotiations with the concerned sectors to accommodate social workers are inevitable. 2. Periodical Study/Assessment of availability and nature of job and presenting the same with the recommendations for the consideration of the government
www.ijmer.in
198
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
3. Identify specific positions in all Government and non Government sectors and placing the same to the perusal of government for issuing notifications. 4. Upgrade or Revise the syllabus and training according to the emerging trends 5. Studies and Research to find out suitable the Indigenous literature 6. Strengthening of Professional Social Work Associations 7. Formation of National Council of Professional Social Work 8. Professional status for social work in India 9. Holding consultation with the different sectors on the nature and type of skills that the teachers equip the students according to the requirements 10. Assess/Study the nature of skills for social workers in the changing development trends 11. Social Work Educators/Practitioners Association: Network of Social Work educators to address all the issues mentioned above will be an added advantage. 12. Holding conferences involving professional from the different sectors on the nature and type of skills that they need. 13. Periodical discussions with the Educators and Practitioners to initiate collective action to uphold the dignity, ethics and values 14. Strengthening the Research and Development by assisting the Government/NGOs projects through social work methods and techniques.
www.ijmer.in
199
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Conclusion In India the Central and State governments have devised and designed different schemes and projects and provides funds, technology, know how, to enable the village authorities to work for developing the villages. The Governments have also devised the scheme for ideal village for motivating the people and organizations for competing to win the prizes and also to inculcate the democratic values. However, the question arises here that whether the implementation of policies and programmes, execution, functions, fulfilment of objectives, expected progress and development has taken place or not. University system has devised and designed the social work education and training for rural development. The trained professional social workers are expected to design need based developmental projects, professional NGOs professional service, fieldwork training, use of social work techniques, methods, institutional services, resolving the problems of the people efficiently and effectively, creating awareness, developing the rural community, enhancing the knowledge, school social work, for deeply rooting the social work profession in the soil. It is also expected that for practicing social work in the rural society, the social work techniques should be used to resolve the problems of the people at individual, group, community, and the institutional level. Social work professionals should function as a “change agent” in the society and try to bring integration, unity and solidarity in the community (Srivastava, 1999). Unfortunately, schools of social work have not developed the theoretical and practical syllabi of social work from the indigenous perspectives. Rural India is deprived of getting all these expected social services. At the same time the social work profession has remained backward. It has been pushed back in terms of employment and self employment. Due to that the parallel profession like Business Administration has entered in the field of social work and that has become a challenge to the profession. It will definitely become www.ijmer.in
200
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
a serious challenge and headache to the profession in near future in this competitive world and there will be a problem of the existence of social work. Reference: 1. Aldridge, M (1994): Making Social Work News, New York: Routledge. 2. Bedi, Kiran and Nair, P.M, (2008): Human Trafficking in India, Yojana Vol.52, pp.8-10, New Delhi: Publication Division, Ministry of Information and Broadcasting 3. Carole Zuffery, 2008: “Social Work, Social Policy and Media”. Journal of Social Work and Society; University of South Australia, Vol.6 (2).pp.87-89. 4. Cox. D (1993): “Social Work Practice and Education and PeopleCentred Development in the Asia-Pacific Region”, The Indian Journal of Social Work, Vol.54 (3). 5. Desai Murali and Narayanan, Lata (1998): “Challenges for Social Work Profession Towards People Centred Development”, in Murali Desai (et.al) edited Towards Peoples Centred Development Vol II, TISS, Bombay. 6. Gangabhushan M. Molankal (2012): Social Work Education in India: Areas of Concern, IBH Prakashana, Bangalore, p.no.199212. 7. Gore, M.S (2011), “Social Work Education”,Rawat Publications, Jaipur.
and
Social
Work
8. Healy, L.M (2001) International Social Work: Professional action in an interdependent world. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press.
www.ijmer.in
201
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
9. International Federation of Social Workers (IFSW 1982), Definition of Social Work, Policy Papers, Oslo, IFSW. 10. Kauffman & Raymond, (1996): Public Perceptions of Social Workers: A Survey of Knowledge and Attitudes, Arete, 20 (2), pp.25-35. 11. Kendall, 1995; Midgley, 1981 Kendall K.A (1995) Foreword. In Watts T.D., Elliott, D & Mayadas, N.S International handbook on Social Work Education, Connecticut: Greenwood Press. 12. Lakshmipathy Raju. M and Krishna, G.R (eds), (1996), Future of Indian Family: Challenges for Social Work Education, Department of Social Work, S.V.Mahila University, Tirupati, A.P, India. 13. National AIDS Control Organisation (NACO, 2005): Facts and Figures observed HIV prevalence levels State wise: 1998-2004, http://www.naco online.org/facts-state wise htm (assessed in February 2005) 14. Nagpaul (1993): “Analysis of Social Work Teaching Material in India”, The Need for Indigenous Foundations,” International Social Work, Vol.36, No.1, January, pp.No.207-220. 15. National Disaster Management Authority, (NDMA, 2010), Guidelines on Psychosocial Support and Mental Health Services. New Delhi: Ministry of Home Affairs. 16. Neate & Philpot, as cited in Franklin,(1998): The Media and Message: A Guide to use the Media for Everyone in Social Care, Suttan Surey, Community Care/RBI 17. Rameshwaridevi, Ravi Prakash (eds).(2001): Social Work Practices, Jaipur: Mangal Deep Publications
www.ijmer.in
202
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
18. Sekhar, K, Parthasarathy R, Muralidhar D, and Rao M.C (Eds), 2007: Hand book of Psychiatric Social Work, Bangalore: NIMHANS 19. Siddiqui H.Y (2010): “Emerging Social Concerns and Issues in the 21st Century: Social Work Response”, in the edited volume, “Social Work Education in India-Challenges and Opportunities”, New Royal Book Company, Lucknow, pp No.79. 20. Somashekharappa C.A,(2010), Fields of Social Work Practice, Edited Volume by B.S.Gunjal and Gangabhushan M.Molankal, Baraha Publishing House, Bangalore, pp.156-167 21. Sonar, Gangadhar B (2004): Old Age Pensioners: SocioPsychological Study, Indian Journal of Gerentology, Vol.18 (20), pp.187-200. 22. Sonar, Gangadhar B (2004): Problems of the Aged: A Social Work Study in Gulbarga District of Karnataka, In Selwyn Stanley (ed). Social Problems in India: Perspectives for Intervention, New Delhi: Allied Publishers, pp.365-375 23. Srivastava, S.P (1999), Addressing the Future of Professional Social Work in India, the Indian Journal of Social Work, 60 (1), pp.118-119. 24. Subhedar, I.S (Reprinted, 2016) “Field Work Training in Social Work”,Rawat Publications, Jaipur. 25. Thomas, Gracious (Ed: 2010), Professional Social Work in Indian Perspectives, New Delhi, IGNOU. 26. Tower, K (2000): “In our own image: Shaping attitudes about social work through television production”. Journal of Social Work Education, Vol.36.pp.575-586.
www.ijmer.in
203
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
WOMEN’S EMANCIPATION AND EMPOWERMENT Dr. Tapash Mohanta Department of Philosophy Raiganj University,Raiganj Dist-Uttar Dinajpur West Bengal, India
Jhumu Saha Ph.D. Research Scholar Department of Philosophy Raiganj University, Raiganj Dist-Uttar Dinajpur West Bengal, India
Even though ‘Feminism’ appeared as a revolution and has been considered as the driving force behind women’s movements and women’s emancipation but still there remains a serious gulf between men and women as far enjoying the powers and rights in the family, society, community are concerned. Exploitation and subjugation of women remains a contentious issue even in the 21st century. Women are lagging behind men in every aspect of human interactions. Of course there we witness some exceptions here and there but this does not help us to generalize that women are emancipated in the 21st century. Women are being exploited in manifold of ways. Women are exploited socially, economically, culturally, politically and all types of exploitations are in some sense or other related with gender discrimination. Therefore, it would still a far cry to claim that women at large are emancipated. The objective of this paper is to explicate the necessity of amalgamation of the twin concepts emancipation and empowerment of women. We think there are various ways through which women can be emancipated but the most important aspect of the empowerment or authorization of women of women. Fowling Amartya Sen we can say so long the agency aspect of women is not developed, emancipation of women would remain a far cry. Sen in this regard cites two development aspects of women, such as, the well-being aspect and the agency aspect. According to Sen, the well-being aspect of women had www.ijmer.in
204
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
been taken care of in various stages of human development. If we look back to the past history of Indian tradition we find that women were taken care off from well-being aspect. Women were kept within the home and gave them the responsibility to take care and look after the home and family. Women were habituated and to some extent enjoyed the responsibility they had been offered. The well-being aspect of women was taken care off. Women had been given a different type of education which was unlikely to the institutional based education. Having said this, emancipation of women remained a far cry. Sen reveals that well-being aspect of women is secondary. What is primary for the emancipation of women is the agency aspect of women what is alternatively termed as the empowerment of women. So long women are not in a position to seize the power, the voice of women; the freedom of women cannot be established. Therefore, the agency aspect of women (i.e., the empowerment of women) would be treated as the most effective means through which women may be emancipated. India is a paradox in many ways. As the locus of spiritualism women were treated as mothers, Devi. At the same time we are habituated to see a heinous activity in each and every day in our national dallies which go against womanhood. India thus suffers from the two greatest evils, such as, the oppression of women and the exploitation of the poor. We very often forget the remark of Swami Vivekananda who once said that women are just like one wing of a bird. A bird cannot fly without a wing, just like a country cannot flourish without women. Thus, emancipation of women by giving them empowerment is a must. We have to realize it. Empowerment of women is nothing but giving power or authority to act independently. Following Kant we can say that freedom of the will and autonomy of moral agent must be protected. If women do not have the right or freedom of the will, if women do not enjoy autonomy and empowerment, emancipation of women in the real sense of the term cannot possible. Freedom of women needs www.ijmer.in
205
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
empowerment. To emancipate women, they must be empowered. We think that empowerment of women must be an integral part of sustainable human development. Empowerment of women is a process of economic and social activities that may alter the position, participation and performance of women. So, to develop a nation, development of women would be treated as the necessary prerequisite. We think women are well developed only when they are empowered. To empowered women is to provide some status or recognition to them. These may be educational status, economic status, financial status, social status, political status, occupational status etc. India has been among the less literate society among the world. The opportunities of education were not open to all sections of the society. Thus empowerment of would remain a far cry so long women are being educated. It is an accepted fact that a woman plays a matchless role in the progress of man and the family. She is the Jevan Shakti of the family. The family, the society and the country can draw valuable benefits from a woman. Having said this, women enjoy a different status than men. Most of their tasks and responsibilities had been undervalued. The discrimination against women adversely affects the distribution of economic and political powers throughout the world. The lower status of women led to their oppression in two ways, such as, oppression outside the family and oppression within the family. Therefore, empowerment of women is gaining added significance in the Indian context owing to greater participation in developmental activities. Empowerment is influenced by the host of socio-economic, political and cultural factors. Therefore, empowerment is a must for emancipation of women. References: 1. Sen, Amartya , The Idea of Justice, Penguin Books, 2009. www.ijmer.in
206
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
2. Badrinath, C. Swami Vivekananda the Living Vedanta, Penguin Books, 2006. 3. Rao, M. K. Empowerment of Women in India, Discovery Publishing House, 2005. 4. Shanthi , K. The Empowerment of Women, Anmol Publications, New Delhi, 1090. 5. Tang, R. Feminist Thought: A Comprehensive Introduction, Oxford, 1989.
www.ijmer.in
207
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
WOMEN EMPOWERMENT - ANCIENT TO MODERN Dr. C.S.Sukumar Reddy Lecturer in Commerce Government Degree College Nagari
Y. Raja Sekhar Lecturer in Commerce PVKN Government Degree College Chittoor
Traditionally, an Indian woman had four fold status-role sequences. These were her role as a daughter, wife, housewife (homemaker), and mother.
ి ర
ర ార
మ
–భ ార
యవ
ప
– న ీ ా తంత మర ి
(Pithaa rakshathi koumaare – Bharthaa rakshathi youvane Rakshanthivaardhake puthraa – na shtree swaathanthriyamarhasi) It was the tradition in olden days that women are protected by father at the age of young, at the age of adolescent by husband, at the age of old age by sons. Hence, no liberty to the women at any age. So says by scriptures. But, women were independent in practice. The women of Epic India enjoyed an honourable position at home. Srimadramayana and Sri Mahabharatha Epics of our mythological treasures had given a respectable place for women. Women were the root of righteousness, prosperity and enjoyment in both the epics. For instances of willpower, courage and valour or prowess of women like Sitha, Sathyabhama, Rukmuni, Sabari, Draupadi etc, During a particular period only women gradually declined and underwent a major change. The girls were deprived of formal education, daughters were regarded as second class citizens. Freedom of women was curtailed. Sons were given more weightage than daughters. Girls were prevented from learning the scriptures and becoming Brahma charinis. www.ijmer.in
208
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
They were given importance at all activities in the home as well as in the society. In the mythology also Sri Mahavishnu has given a place at the heart to Sri Mahalakshmi, Shiva is also well known as Arthanaareeswara for the half of the body given to his consort Parvathi and Brahma also gives due importance to his Bharathi Devi in all his creations of the universe. In all most all incarnations of Sri Mahavishnu, women are given optimum priority. Sita was given utmost importance in all. She herself only went to forests with Sri Rama without the influence of others. The divine couple remained committed to righteousness (Dharma) at all costs. If Sri Rama is the embodiment of righteousness (Dharma), Sita is a cut above in her commitment to her duties. Even in the adversities, Sita’s stature stands tall because of her loyalty to Dharma. Her boundless compassion is seen when she restrains Hanuman from attacking the demo nesses who had threatened her. The woman, whose status and role traditionally was well defined and almost fixed in the society, is now experiencing far-reaching changes. Really says the beauty in all certain activities rendering by women is unparallel and we can not define the rapture of men, who take the women as their consorts in certain activities. So scriptures also reiterate the beauty of women as like different roles of the life of men.
“ ా ష ర
చల
జష మ
ీ కరణష మం మయ ధ శయ ష రంభ
షట ర య ా క ల ధర ప
“
“ Kaaryeshu daasee karaneshu manthri Roopecha lakshmi kshamayaa dharithri Bhojyeshu maathaa shayaneshu rambha Shatkarmayukthaa kula dharma pathni “ www.ijmer.in
209
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
The beauty is in the eyes of
beholder.
Whatever we see and
observe we feel as it is beauty as our heart. Women are given due importance by men in different angles or different roles of man’s life. She creates a world of equanimity to the men. The roles that
As a servant in rendering services to men
As a minister in managing the things to do
As a goddess of wealth in semblance
As earth in showering of endurance
As a mother in feed
As a pretty woman (Rambha) at bed time
These are the certain SIX roles of woman in all sorts of man. Such an importance is given to woman. Even in Manu Dharma shaasthra also says the mother as
సహసంత
ిత
మ
ర
చ
ే“
Sahasranthu pithroon maathaa gouravenaathirichyathe (A mother is more noble i.e.exalted than a thousands of fathers). It is the respect given to the women. Bharthruhari also says as “
దమ ల
కృ ి మ ల
దం జ నం దం
ామ ల
న ం - ధనమ ల
దం గృహం దం జగ
“
(Vedamoolamidam gnaanam – bhaaryaamoolamidam graham Krishimoolamidam dhaanyam – dhanamoolamidam jagath.) The root cause of wisdom is scriptures
The root cause of home is woman or female
www.ijmer.in
210
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
The root cause of paddy is Industry i.e. assiduous or working hard
The root cause of the universe is grandeur i.e.wealth or opulence
This is the education to know the resplendent and variegated importance of woman in the man’s splendid life. To the home woman only empowered to do everything and anything. **** In modern world women are the key to rebuilding a community. The woman wants roots for her family. We can see a worker, a provider, an educator, a caretaker, a networker in her. The woman in modern times is entering into certain new fields that were unknown to the woman’s sphere of role – sets. They are activating participating in social, economic and political activities. The women of the present generation have generally received higher education than the women of their preceding generation. They have been far reaching consequences in the economic status of their families. The modern women are inclined towards the social issues, and trying hard to improve the social status of woman at large. Because of the awareness and education women are inspired and came out of the four walls of the home. In independent India, a large group of women actively participated in the nationalist movement and secured eminent positions and offices in administration and public life. Traditionally, Indian women exist because of the family and for the family. The modern women has started caring for her health, figure, culture needs and interests, academic pursuits, social intercourse, religious activities recreational needs etc. Just like their man counterpart, women are alsofond of attending social functions and value her soial life quite a lot. Previously, men folk used to discourage women from leaving their social their households for attending social functions. Now the spread of education, especially that of women and www.ijmer.in
211
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
with that
the changing social attitudes of educated women have
changed the order as
As a wife almost equally to that of her husband to perform the functions of social as well as biological..
Gradually, women are participating in political life
Participating in socio economic activities
Modern women keenly desires to enter into awork career because of the pressure of economic needs of the family to achieve higher education to the children and higher standards of living women also participating in economic activities. Rural women welfare organizations play a vital role at national level with an empowerment of women. The modern women is acting as playmate, guide, mentor, counselor, a teacher, a sensitive respondent to the children and she acts many roles to the needs of children for their emotional requirements. Conclusion: Educated women or rural women whoever may be has taken a power of control of physical or psychological or economical whatever it may be… the women are just on the threshold of transition from tradition to modernity. Their independence and equality are gradually coming up. It is positive appreciable change and wherever the degradation regarding their performance and progress is highly refutable in any form.
www.ijmer.in
212
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION USING BMA G.Sharmila Sujatha Department of Computer Science and Systems Engineering Andhra University Visakhapatnam, AP, India
Prof. V.Valli Kumari Department of Computer Science and Systems Engineering Andhra University Visakhapatnam, AP, India
Abstract: The paper describes an approach to moving object detection and tracking fully based on the Block Matching Algorithm (BMA). BMA partitions the current frame in small, fixed size blocks and matches them in the previous frame in order to estimate blocks displacement (referred to as motion vectors) between two successive frames. The detection and tracking approach is as follows. BMA provides motion vectors. Finally, the tracking algorithm establishes the correspondences between the object detected in each frames of the sequence, allowing the estimation of their trajectories as well as the detection of new entries and exits. The tracking algorithm is strongly based on the BMA. Here at two level iam using block matching algorithm. when input as video find moving object. The features such as color, texture, edge density and motion are extracted from each frame. In the feature extraction, initially, the motion feature is extracted using an efficient motion estimation algorithm based on similarity measures followed by other feature extractions. 1 Introduction and related work. Detection and tracking of moving objects is important in the analysis of video data [5]. Motion is detected using statistical hypothesis testing on difference image between two consecutive frames [2]. Tracking-based approaches for abandoned object detection often become unreliable in complex surveillance videos due to occlusions, lighting changes, and other factors [13]. Video surveillance has been www.ijmer.in
213
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
widely used in recent years to enhance public safety and privacy protection. A video surveillance system that deals with content analysis and activity monitoring needs efficient transmission and storage of the surveillance video data. Video compression techniques can be used to achieve this goal by reducing the size of the video with no or small quality loss [12]. A distributed video-surveillance system for the detection of dangerous situations related to the presence of abandoned objects in the waiting rooms of unattended railway stations is presented [1]. Autonomous video surveillance and monitoring has a rich history [10]. In general video surveillance systems uses background estimation and subtraction for the detection and tracking of moving objects. Real world applications can deliver a better performance provided if they are able to tolerate the presence of outliers in the data [7]. In the recent years both in home and business environments for security and management of access points, automatic visual object counting and video surveillance have gained important application [14]. Motion analysis algorithms are based on processing of multipleregression pseudo spectrums [15]. Identifying the significant features for performing accurate classification is known as feature selection. The major phases in finding out the feature subset selection system are using best search strategy for finding features. Subsequently, evaluation for testing the significance of these features identified in previous phase [4].In many applications for performing traffic monitoring, human motion capture and also for video surveillance using the moving object detection using background subtraction methods [3]. Detected objects are tracked, and each tracked object has a state for handling occlusion and interference [6]. In the recent past, autonomous video surveillance and monitoring has gained lot of importance as they are able to track human motion in indoor and www.ijmer.in
214
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
controlled outdoor environments efficiently [9]. Detection of moving objects is done based on multi-layer lidar that also characterize a zone of interest for reducing the computation complexity of the perception process. Then, fixed frame is used for objects localization and tracking [11]. The Sequence Frame Detection Accuracy (SFDA) is a frame-level measure that penalizes for fragmentations in the spatial dimension while accounting for number of objects detected, missed detects, false alarms and spatial alignment of system output and ground truth objects [8]. Tracking-based approaches for abandoned object detection often become unreliable in complex surveillance videos due to occlusions, lighting changes, and other factors [10]. The rest of the paper is organized as follows. Section II provides various researches conducted in relation to our proposed work. Section III explains about the design strategy and the proposed method. Section IV shows the result and discussion of our proposed method and finally section V concludes our proposed method for video based motion detection and tracking. 2 .Previous work Kalpesh R Jadav, Prof.M.A.Lokhandwal and Prof.A.P.Gharge[29] ,"Vision based moving object detection and tracking", used in video surveillance system. This monitor system cannot find the difference of brightness between the background and moving object is so small. The accurate moving objet is cannot be achieved. The computation time also increase to heal the noise. The target identified in video clip is on rough area. 3.Proposed System. In Proposed System the video in database is devided in to small ones using BMA (i.e Block Matching Algorithm) that is nothing but the shot segmentation. those small videos were converted into more number of
www.ijmer.in
215
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
frames. videos were subjected to two types of tracking Forward tracking and Background tracking.
are subjected to clustering. In my
Then the frames work fuzzy c means clustering
algorithm is used for the effective clustering. Thus we obtained two types of clustering output as cluster 1 and cluster 2. From the clustered1 and clustered 2, Features such as texture, color, Edge and motion features were extracted.All the Frames are clustered and same procedure is repeated for all frames.Next is distance is calculated for the objecte tracking.The Process all these is as follows Step: 1 initially the input video has been taken from the database. Step: 2 then that database video was under goes shot segmentation process using block matching technique. During block matching the input videos were sp lit up into more number of small videos.
Fig1.Block Matching Step: 3 then those small videos were converted into more number of frames. {Frame1, frame 2…frame (n)}
www.ijmer.in
216
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
(a)
(b)………………………………………….…….(n) Fig2 :frame1 to frame n
Step: 4 before frame conversion the small videos were subjected to two types of tracking. i)
Forward tracking
ii)
Background tracking
Input Video
Shot segmentation (Block matching) Forward Tracking (From 1st to end)
Backward Tracking (From end to 1st)
Forward tracking :( the same procedure will be repeated in backward tracking from the end to 1st) Step: 5 then the frames were subjected to clustering.(clustering is nothing separated based on groups) Here in our work fuzzy c means clustering algorithm is used for the effective clustering. Thus we obtained two types of clustering output as cluster 1 and cluster 2. Step: 6 Feature extractions: From the clustered1 and clustered 2, Features such as texture, color, Edge and motion features were extracted. Cluster 1 Feature (F1) i)
Texture (LBP)
www.ijmer.in
217
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
ii)
Color (HSV)
iii)
Edge (canny)
iv)
Motion (block matching technique)
Cluster 2 Feature (F2) i)
Texture (LBP)
ii)
Color (HSV)
iii)
Edge (canny)
iv)
Motion (block matching technique)
Here the color feature is extracted using HSV ,it is more related human eyeperception.The texture feature is extracted using the local binary patterrn.The edge feature is extracted using the cannydetection andMotion feature is extracted using again BMA
Fig3.Block Matching Step: 7 up to the step (6) the same procedure will be repeated for all the frames. Frame1, frame2, frame3….frame (n)). Step: 8 Distance calculation for features between every frame. The distance between the frames is calculated for each and every frame. (Eg: frame 1 and frame 2).if it is minimum than the corresponding threshold value then takes that frame. Else leave it.
www.ijmer.in
218
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Frame 1 (F1, F2),
Frame 2 (F1, F2), Distance <150 Thus we obtained a segmented image. Step: 9 then the distance between the segmented image and background image should be taken. i) If it is non-zero value then replace with original image value else if it is zero then there will be no change. OB= Background image - Segmentation image Step: 10 then the final step is object tracking, during object tracking the backward tracking and forward tracking output is intersected.
forward tracking backward tracking
www.ijmer.in
219
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Here Input Video
Shot segmentation (Block matching) Forward Tracking st (From 1 to end)
Backward Tracking st (From end to 1 )
Frame
Frame
FCM
clustering 1 and 2
FCM
Feature Extraction
Feature Extraction Cluster 1 Feature (F1) i) Texture (LBP) ii) Color (HSV) iii) Edge (canny) iv) Motion (block matching)
Cluster 2 Feature (F2) i) Texture (LBP) ii) Color (HSV) iii) Edge (canny) iv) Motion (block matching)
Distance calculation for feature, (F1, F2), distance <150
clustering 1 and 2
Frame 1 Frame 2 (F1, F2),
OB= Background image - Segmentation image i) if (non zero value then replace with original image value ii) zero means no change
Cluster 1 Feature (F1) i) Texture (LBP) ii) Color (HSV) iii) Edge (canny) iv) Motion (block matching)
Cluster 2 Feature (F2) i) Texture (LBP) ii) Color (HSV) iii) Edge (canny) iv) Motion (block matching)
Distance calculation for feature, (F1, F2), distance <150
Frame 1 Frame 2 (F1, F2),
OB= Background image - Segmentation image i) if (non zero value then replace with original image value ii) zero means no change
Object Tracking
[Forward
backward] Object Tracked
www.ijmer.in
220
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION The proposed motion based object detection and tracking system was implemented in the working platform of MATLAB. The detection and tracking process is tested with different frames of video and the upcoming result of the proposed work has been shown below. Initially, the video are segmented to different shots or frames and then features are extracted followed by the detection and tracking process. The results obtained by our proposed method for different frames of the input video is shown below, As mentioned in the proposed part, the input video is first segmented into different frames for processing. The frame got after the segmentation is then applied for the remaining steps in our proposed method. First the input frame is subjected to feature extraction where the shape and the corner features are extracted. These feature extraction provides better outcome when compared to other methods of feature extraction. The Fig 8(a) is the original image of the ship obtained from the shot segmentation. Fig8 (b) is the output after the feature extraction process Fig8 (c) shows the resultant image after the object detection process and finally Fig 8(d) shows the tracked image of the object in the first frame. Similarly for different frames the process is repeated and finally the object is tracked. The proposed methodology proved to be more effective and accurate in object detection and tracking.
www.ijmer.in
221
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Fig 4:Results of object tracking in first frame (Video 2): (a) Input frame; (b) feature extracted output (c)Detected object;(d) Object tracking. PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS: The precision and recall value for the proposed method are calculated for analyzing the performance. Let the object to be tracked be denoted by OT and the tracked output is denoted as TO , then precision and recall is expressed as,
precision
www.ijmer.in
OT TO TO
(12)
222
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
recall
OT TO OT
(13)
Precision measures how much of TO covers the OT and recall measures how much of OT is covered by the TO .Using Eq. (12) and Eq. (13), the precision and recall values for the query image are calculated for the proposed method and also for the existing method. The F-measure for the proposed method is then calculated using the expression,
precision. recall F 2 precision recall
(14)
The values obtained from the calculation are given in Table 1. These values are used for the analysis of performance between the proposed and existing method. Here the existing method is the previous paper where object detection and tracking using low level features is performed. Each values relating to the methods are entered in the table for comparison and from the table it is clear that our proposed method delivers better precision and recall than the existing method. Here the existing method is the vision based object detection and tracking [29].
S. No
Performance Analysis Precision
F-Measure
Recall
Proposed Method
Existing Method
Proposed Method
Existing Method
Proposed Method
Existing Method
1
0.85
0.45
0.95
0.23
0.8972
0.3044
2
0.88
0.52
0.92
0.27
0.8995
0.3554
3
0.88
0.55
0.99
0.30
0.9317
0.3882
4
0.89
0.52
0.99
0.34
0.9373
0.4111
5
0.89
0.46
0.99
0.42
0.9373
0.4390
www.ijmer.in
223
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Table1: Precision and Recall for the proposed method 1 0.9 0.8 F Measuree
0.7 0.6 Proposed
0.5
Existing
0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 1
2
3
4
5
Fig5: Precision and Recall for the proposed method The average F-measure value for the proposed and existing method is found out and the corresponding graph is shown in fig 8, F-measure
Average F-measure
Methods Proposed
Existing
0.9983
0.4039
Table 2: Average F-measure for proposed and existing methods
www.ijmer.in
224
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
Proposed
0.5
Existing
0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0
Fig 6: Average F-measure for proposed and existing methods CONCLUSION: In this paper we have proposed efficient motion based object detection and tracking system. We developed a unique method using Block matching algorithm and our method proves it is a well organized method for motion estimation to track and detect the objects in the video. As the results shows the proposed methodology proved to be more efficient and accurate in object detection and tracking than the previous methods. To prove the effectiveness of our proposed method we have compared the precision and recall value along with F-measure of the proposed method with existing method for the object detection and tracking process. As per the performance analysis, it is clear that our proposed method provides better F-measure value when comparing with other method. As a result it can be concluded that our proposed method is efficient in the field of object detection and tracking.
www.ijmer.in
225
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
References: [1] Claudio Sacchi and Carlo S. Regazzoni, “A Distributed Surveillance System for Detection of Abandoned Objects in Unmanned Railway Environments”, IEEE Transactions on Vehicular Technology, Vol. 49, No. 5, September 2000. [2] Sang Won Hwang, Eun Yi Kim, Se Hyun Park and Hang Joon Kim, “Object Extraction and Tracking Using Genetic Algorithm”, IEEE Transactions, 2001. [3] Rita Cucchiara, Costantino Grana, Massimo Piccardi and Andrea Prati, “Detecting Moving Objects, Ghosts and Shadows in Video Streams”, IEEE Transactions on Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence, Vol. 25, pp. 1337-1342, October 2003. [4] Zehang Suna , George Bebisa and Ronald Millerb, “Object detection using feature subset selection”, Journal of the Pattern Recognition Society, March 2004. [5] Chandrika Kamath, Abel Gezahegne, Shawn Newsam and George M. Roberts,” Salient Points for Tracking Moving Objects in Video”, Image and Video Communications and Processing, 2005. [6] Masayuki Yokoyama and Tomaso Poggio, “A Contour-Based Moving Object Detection and Tracking”, In proceedings of Visual Surveillance and Performance Evaluation of Tracking and Surveillance, 2005. [7] Codrut Ianasi, Vasile Gui, Corneliu I. Toma, and Dan Pescaru, "A Fast Algorithm for Background Tracking in Video Surveillance, Using Nonparametric Kernel Density Estimation", Electronics and Energetics, Vol. 18, No. 1, pp. 127-144, 2005. [8] Vasant Manohar, Padmanabhan Soundararajan, HarishRaju, Dmitry Goldgof, Rangachar Kasturi, and John Garofolo, "Performance Evaluation of Object Detection and Tracking in Video", In Proceedings
www.ijmer.in
226
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
of 7th Asian Conference on Computer Vision, Hyderabad, pp. 151–161, 2006. [9] Kaiqi Huanga, Liangsheng Wanga, Tieniu Tana, and Steve Maybank, "A real-time object detecting and tracking system for outdoor night surveillance", ELSEVIER Pattern Recognition, Vol. 41, pp. 432-444, 2008. [10] Limin Liu, Zhen Li, Member, and Edward J. Delp, “Efficient and Low Complexity Surveillance Video Compression Using Backward Channel Aware Wyner-Ziv Video Coding”, IEEE Transactions, June 2008. [11] Sergio A. Rodríguez F, Vincent Frémont, Philippe Bonnifait and Véronique Cherfaoui, ” An Embedded Multi-Modal System for Object Localization and Tracking”, IEEE Intelligent Vehicles Symposium, 2010. [12] Sherin M. Youssef, Meer A. Hamza and Arige F. Fayed, “Detection and Tracking of Multiple Moving Objects with Occlusion in Smart Video Surveillance Systems”, IEEE Transactions, 2010. [13] Yuping Lin, Qian Yu and Gérard Medioni, “Efficient detection and tracking of moving objects in geo-coordinates”, Machine Vision and Applications, Vol. 22, pp. 505–520, 2011. [14] Thi Thi Zin, Pyke Tin, Takashi Toriu and Hiromitsu Hama, “A Probability-based Model for Detecting Abandoned Objects in Video Surveillance Systems”, Proceedings of the World Congress on Engineering, July 2012. [15] Boris Vishnyakov, Yury Vizilter and Vladimir Knyaz, “SpectrumBased Object Detection And Tracking Technique For Digital Video Surveillance”, International Archives of the Photogrammetry, September 2012.
www.ijmer.in
227
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
[16] R. Bogush, S.Maltsev, A. Kastryuk, N. Brovko and D. Hlukhau, “Motion detection and tracking algorithms in video streams”, Journal of Science, Mathematics – Physics, Vol. 25, pp. 143-151, 2009 [17] Jalil Rasekhi, MohammadReza Karami and Mojtaba Bandarabadi, “Wavelet Transform and Supervised Learning Methods for Object Tracking”, European Journal of Scientific Research ISSN 1450-216X Vol.41 No.4, pp.626-631, 2010 [18] Shih-Chia Huang, “An Advanced Motion Detection Algorithm with Video Quality Analysis for Video Surveillance Systems”, IEEE Transactions On Circuits And Systems For Video Technology, Vol. 21, No. 1, January 2011. [19] Rajiv Kumar Nath and Dr. Swapan Kumar Deb, “On Road Vehicle/Object Detection And Tracking Using Template”, Indian Journal of Computer Science and Engineering, Vol 1 No 2, 98-107, Sept 2010. [20] YingLi Tian, Rogerio Schmidt Feris, Haowei Liu, Arun Hampapur, and Ming-Ting Sun, “Robust Detection of Abandoned and Removed Objects in Complex Surveillance Videos”, IEEE Transactions On Systems, Vol. 41, No. 5, September 2011. [21] Carlos R. del-Blanco, Fernando Jaureguizar, and Narciso García, “An Efficient Multiple Object Detection and Tracking Framework for Automatic Counting and Video Surveillance Applications”, IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, Vol. 58, No. 3, August 2012. [22] Shin-Chih Tu, Guey-Yun Chang, Jang-Ping Sheu, Wei Li and KunYing Hsieh, “Scalable continuous object detection and tracking in sensor networks”, Journal of Parallel and Distributed Computing, Vol. 70, pp. 212-224, 2010
www.ijmer.in
228
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
[23] Hui Kong, J. Y Audibert and J. Ponce, “Detecting Abandoned Objects With a Moving Camera”, Image Processing, Vol. 19, No. 8, pp. 2201-2210, 2010 [24] Peter Dunne and Bogdan J. Matuszewski, “Histogram-based Detection of Moving Objects for Tracker Initialization in Surveillance Video”, International Journal of Grid and Distributed Computing, Vol. 4, No. 3, pp. 71-78, Sept 2011 [25] Subhabrata Bhattacharya, Haroon Idrees, Imran Saleemi, Saad Ali, and Mubarak Shah, “Moving Object Detection and Tracking in Forward Looking Infra-Red Aerial imagery”, Machine Vision Beyond Visible Spectrum, Vol. 1, No. 3, pp. 221-252, 2011 [26] J. Fernandeza, R. Guerreroa, N. Mirandaa and F. Piccolia ,"MultiLevel Paralelism In Image Identification,"Mecanica Computational,Vol.28,pp.227-240,Argentina,Nov 2009. [27] Li Li, Xianglin Zeng,Xi Li,Weiming Hu and Pengfei Zhu ,"Video Shot Segmentation Using Graph-based Dominant-Set Clustering," In.proc.of. First International Conference on Internet Multimedia Computing and Service,New York,USA,2009. [28] Liang Xiao and Tong-qiang Li ,"Research on Moving Object Detection and Tracking,"In.proc.of.Seventh International Conference on Fuzzy Systems and Knowledge Discovery,pp.2324-2327, 2010. [29] Kalpesh R Jadav, Prof.M.A.Lokhandwala and Prof.A.P.Gharge ,"Vision based moving object detection and tracking",National Conference on Recent Trends in Engineering & Technology,May 2011.
www.ijmer.in
229
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
IMPACT OF SUBJECT ON POLITICAL AWARENESS OF SOCIAL STUDIES AND SCIENCE TEACHERS OF SECONDARY SCHOOLS G.Varalaxmi Principal SRM College of Education Gurramguda, , Ranga Reddy District Abstract: The investigation was carried out with the objective of finding out “the level of political awareness of high school teachers. The study was conducted on 100 secondary school teachers belonging to social studies and science. A survey method is adopted; questionnaire is used as a tool. Questionnaire contains 20 items based on constitutional objectives fundamental rights and general awareness on politics. The survey revealed that there is significant difference among social studies and science teachers on level of political awareness. Introduction: School is one of the agencies of socialization. There are at least four ways in which the school may relate to the political system. a) To the political socialization of children and youth, b) through the selection, recruitment and training of political leaders , c) through politically integrating community or society and d) through the organization of special interest group which attempt to influence political decision. ( Byron G. Massialas) In its role as an agent of political socialization, the school implicitly or explicitly may contribute to the child’s development of basic political orientation towards the system (Byron G. Massialas) School is one of the agencies of socialization. Socialization is a process through which people learn culture. Political culture is part of culture. Through political socialization people learn about political culture. Political socialization is generally the process of acquiring and changing the www.ijmer.in
230
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
culture of one’s own political environment. Political “Socialization is the study of the developmental process by which people of all ages and adolescents acquire political cognition, attitudes and behavior” (Powell L Cowerty (2003) Political culture is imbibed to the people through the process of political socialization. Political culture of the people gives them an orientation towards in their the simplest meaning to be politically oriented would mean in general knowing how your government operates having cognitive map of polity - and also knowing how it ought to operate and it ought and ought not do – having a normative map. A national political culture includes its citizens orientations towards three levels, the political process, and polity output and outcomes. The system level involves the citizen and leader views of the values and organizations that comprise the political systems. Do citizens identify with the nation and accept the general systems of government? . The process level includes expectations of how politics should function, and individual relationship to the political process. The policy level duals with citizens and leaders. Policy expectations from the government. What are the government’s policy goals and how are they to be achieved (Gabriel A. Almond G. Bingham Powell Jr.). A number of political scientists seized on the notion of socialization and sought to understand it specially in political terms. Gabriel Almond states that political socialization is “ the process of induction into the political culture. Its end product is a set of attitudes – cognitions, value standards, feelings- towards the political system. Its various roles and role incumbents (Almond 1960 PP 27-28). According to Henry ECK Stein (1963) . Political socialization is a “ process through which values, cognitions and symbols are learned and internalized through which operative social norms regarding politics are implanted, political
www.ijmer.in
231
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
roles institutionalized and political consensus created either effectively or ineffectively. National curriculum frame work for teacher education of 2009 emphasis the need of teachers who promote values of peace, democratic way of life, equality, justice, liberty, fraternity, secularism and zeal for social construction. It also said “ there must be one or two courses to engage learner with social science concept and specific issues critical in contemporary Indian society, concepts from across a range of social science discipline such as civilization and democracy, nation state, constitutional values and provisions, cultural and social stratification are likely to equip the teachers with tools of analysis and perspective on social reality. If political culture and political socialization are given due importance in B.Ed curriculum, we can prepare teachers with good political culture, they can be good agents of political socialization. In 1st semester of present two year B.Ed curriculum , in paper I i.e., Perspectives of education at Unit V, a topic is included on Indian constitution. Previous curriculums also included constitutional provisions, fundamental rights, directive principles of state policy fundamental duties in the same paper. Since it is a general paper to every student teacher irrespective of the methodology. The purpose of inclusion in the curriculum is all student teachers including science and mathematics should have knowledge on constitution and political system. For this purpose to test the awareness of social studies and science teachers of secondary schools a study is conducted by the investigator. Significance of the study: In democracies the role of the citizens is very important. Democracies need enlightened, educated citizens for its success. Citizens need high level of political efficacy, political participation, political awareness and www.ijmer.in
232
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
leadership qualities. They must know the importance of voting for selection of representatives and also citizens must cultivate abilities of interest articulation. This can be done through political socialization process. Political socialization refers to the process by which the cultural values of the state can be transmitted from one generation to another. There are various agencies of political socialization such as family, school, mass media, peer groups etc… After family, school is the most influential of all agencies. Due to the child’s extended exposure to varieties of political beliefs, such as friends and teachers, both respected sources of information In schools children learn about political culture which includes political values, beliefs, symbols and institutions. They will be trained in leadership, participation. Teacher has a great role to play as agents of the political socialization to mould children as democratic citizen. India is changing from traditional society to modern one. In this transition period, modernity in tradition prevails. Some aspects of the traditional culture exist with modern political culture. Lack of knowledge about even the basics of the state’s political system discourages political participation. Citizens who do not understand the systems are likely to believe that they cannot make a difference. They certainly do not have the tools to make a difference. Citizens must be given political literacy that can be done in schools and colleges through class room learning and out of class room learning. For that teachers must have knowledge of political culture. Teachers also must participate in various activities of the society. They must have the ability to influence the political system and ability to interest articulation, must possess leadership qualities. Teacher needs political awareness, political efficacy and participation by that they can transmit political culture to future citizens. It is very important to study how far teachers have political culture and what is the level of political culture www.ijmer.in
233
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
of the teachers Political awareness is one of the aspects of political culture. Investigator made a study on level of political awareness among social studies and science teachers of secondary schools. Objectives of the study: To study the level of political awareness of social studies and science teachers of secondary schools. Methodology adopted:
A survey method is adopted to collect the
data on political awareness of the social studies and science teachers. Survey is conducted through a questionnaire. Questionnaire is prepared on the basis of objectives of the study. Description of the questionnaire:
In questionnaire twenty
questions are given to test the awareness of the social studies and science teachers. These questions are based on constitutional objectives fundamental rights, general awareness on politics. Sample:
A sample of 100 high school teachers are selected from
schools of Hyderabad through stratified random sampling, among them 50 are social studies teachers and remaining 50 are science teachers. Variable: Subject of the teacher Research question: What is the level of political awareness among social studies and science teachers of secondary schools? Hypothesis: There will be significant difference among social studies and science teachers of secondary schools regarding political awareness. Data analysis: Item wise analysis is done, each question is given one mark a scoring. On the basis of responses of the high school teachers the awareness is calculated and categorized into three levels .
www.ijmer.in
234
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Levels of awareness:
High- 70 to 100 % Medium: 69 to 50 % Low
below 50 %
Inferential non parametric statistical tool Chi- square is used to know the significance difference among social studies and science teachers and descriptive statistics like per cent age is used to describe the data. POLITICAL
AWARENESS
OF
SOCIAL
STUDIES
AND
SCIENCE TEACHERS OF SECONDARY SCHOOLS Sub:Teachers
Low
Medium
High
Num bers
%
Numb ers
%
Numbe rs
%
Social studies
8
16
12
24
30
60
Science
22
44
18
36
10
20
Total
30
30
40
Total 50 50 100
Above table indicates levels of political awareness among high school science and social studies teachers. It can be seen from the table that about 60 per cent of social studies teachers are having high level political awareness where as among 50 high school teachers only 20 per cent are having high level political awareness. 24 per cent of social studies teachers and 36 per cent of science teachers are having medium level political awareness. 16 per cent of social studies teachers and 44 per cent are science teachers are having low level awareness. Null hypothesis:
There is no significant difference among social
studies and science teachers of secondary schools regarding political awareness
www.ijmer.in
235
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Null hypothesis is tested by statistical techniques i.e., chi square test and the result obtained were interpreted at 95 per cent level of significance. Testing of null hypothesis Item
Value
Table value
5.99
Calculated value
17.18
Degrees of freedom Levels of significance
2 0.05
The calculated value of chi square i.e. 17.18 is more than the table value of 5.99 at 2 degrees of freedom at 0.05 per cent level of significance. Hence the null hypothesis is rejected and alternative hypothesis i.e. there will be significant difference among social studies and science teachers of secondary schools regarding political awareness. Findings:
From the above results we can infer that there is
significant difference between social studies teachers and science teachers. Social studies teachers are having high level to medium level knowledge. Only few per cent age of science teachers i.e. 20 per cent are having high level knowledge. 80 per cent of the science teachers are not aware of fundamental rights where as 60 per cent social studies teachers are aware of fundamental rights. 90 per cent of science teachers are not aware about what is the fundamental law of the land and objectives of the Indian constitution where as social studies teachers are having good awareness.
www.ijmer.in
236
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
Among 50 science teachers, 30 teachers could not answer how the President is appointed. Among 50 social studies teachers, 40 could give correct answer. Among 50 science teachers, 35 teachers do not know about article 21 A i.e. right to education, Article tells that 23 there should not be any trafficking in the life of women and children, Article 24 tells that children under 14 years should not be employed in any hazardous job. All 50 social studies teachers could answer correctly about the point under discussion Conclusion:
Political awareness is very important to the teachers,
due importance should be given in B.Ed. Curriculum transaction. Though it is included in perspectives of education there must be attitudinal changes mostly it is accepted that political concepts are the concern of social studies teachers and not of science and mathematics teachers. All the students irrespective of their methodology must learn constitutional provisions. More importance should be given in inculcating awareness of constitutional values fundamental rights, directive principles of state policy and constitutional objectives. As democratic citizens every one must be aware of constitutional provisions and values, by that all student teachers as future teachers would bear the responsibility of political socialization. References: 1. Byron G. Massialas: The school is the political socialization of children and youth) 2. Powell L Cowerty (2003): Political campaign communication inside and out Allyn and Bacon 3. (Comparative Politics today – Gabriel A. Almond G. Bingham Powell Jr.). 4. (Almond 1960 PP 27-28). 5. Henry ECK Stein (1963) 6. National curriculum Framework for Teacher Education, 2009 New Delhi. www.ijmer.in
237
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
A CRITICAL REVIEW ON THE HISTORY AND EVOLUTION OF ‘GAY’ K.Chandrasekhara Rao Research Scholar P.G Department of Legal Studies and Research Acharya Nagarjuna University Nagarjuna Nagar, Guntur, A.P INTRODUCTION ‘Gay’ is a word that primarily refers to a homosexual person. The term was originally used to refer to feelings of being "carefree", "happy", or "bright and showy"; it had also come to acquire some connotations of "immorality" as early as 16371. The term's use as a reference to homosexuality may date as early as the late 19th century, but its use gradually increased in the : 20th century2. In modern English, gay has come to be used as an adjective, and as a noun, referring to the people, especially to men, and the practices and cultures associated with homosexuality. By the end of the 20th century, the word gay was recommended by major LGBT groups and style guides to describe people attracted to members of the same sex.3 At about the same time, a new pejorative use became prevalent in some parts of the world. In the Anglosphere, this connotation, among younger speakers, has a derisive meaning equivalent to rubbish or stupid (as in "That's so gay.")4. In this use, the word does not mean homosexual", so it can be used, for example, to refer to an inanimate object or abstract concept of which one disapproves. This usage can also refer to weakness or unmanliness. When used in this way, the extent to
1
"Online Etymology Dictionary". "GLAAD Media Reference Guide - Offensive Terms To Avoid".2012-04-21. 3 “APA Style Guide: Avoiding Heterosexual Bias in Language". 4 Sherwin, Adam (6 June 2006). "BBC ruling on use of the word gay". The Times (London). Retrieved 3 May 2010.
2
www.ijmer.in
238
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
which it still retains connotations of homosexuality has been debated and harshly criticized5. HISTORY AND EVOLUTION OF ‘GAY’ The word "gay" arrived in English during the 12th century from Old French gai, most likely deriving ultimately from a Germanic source. For most of its life in English, the word's primary meaning was "joyful", "carefree", "bright and showy", and the word was very commonly used with this meaning in speech and literature. For example, optimistic 1890s are still often referred to as the Gay Nineties.The title of the 1938 French ballet Galte Parisienne ("Parisian Gaiety"), which became the 1941 Warner Brothers movie, The Gay Parisian,6 also illustrates this connotation. It was apparently not until the 20th century that the word began to be used to mean specifically "homosexual", although it had earlier acquired sexual connotations. The derived abstract noun gaiety remains largely free of sexual connotations, and has, in the past, been used in the names of places of entertainment; for example W.B. Yeats heard Oscar Wilde lecture at the Gaiety Theatre in Dublin7. By the mid-20th century, gay was well established in reference to hedonistic and uninhibited life styles8 and its antonym straight, which had long had connotations of seriousness, respectability, and conventionality, had now acquired specific connotations of heterosexuality9. In the case of gay, other connotations of frivolousness and showiness in dress ("gay apparel") led to association with camp and effeminacy. This association no doubt helped the gradual narrowing in 5
"Anti-gay abuse seen to pervade U.S. schools". Archived from the original on 2007-0301. 6 The Gay Parisian (1941) -IMDb 7 "Publications". Oscar Wilde Society. 1 November 2008. Retrieved 4 August 2009. 8 "Oxford English Dictionary". 9 "Online Etymology Dictionary".
www.ijmer.in
239
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
scope of the term towards its current dominant meaning, which was at first confined to subcultures. Gay was the preferred term since other terms, such as queer, were felt to be derogatory10. Homosexual is perceived as excessively clinical11, since the sexual orientation now commonly referred to as "homosexuality" was at that time a mental illness diagnosis in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM). In mid-20th century Britain, where male homosexuality was illegal until the Sexual Offences Act 1967, to openly identify someone as homosexual was considered very offensive and an accusation of serious criminal activity. Additionally, none of the words describing any aspect of homosexuality were considered suitable for polite society. Consequently, a number of euphemisms were used to hint at suspected homosexuality. Examples include "sporty" girls and "artistic" boys12, all with the stress deliberately on the otherwise completely innocent adjective. The sixties marked the transition in the predominant meaning of the word gay from that of carefree" to the current "homosexual". By 1963, a new sense of the word gay was known well enough to be used by Albert Ellis in his book The Intelligent Woman's Guide to ManHunting. Similarly, Hubert Selby, Jr. in his 1964 novel Last Exit to Brooklyn, could write "[he] took pride in being a homosexual by feeling intellectually and esthetically superior to those (especially women) who weren't gay...”13 Later examples of the original meaning of the word being used in popular culture include the theme song to the 1960- 1966 10
"A queer use of an inoffensive little word; Philip Howard". The Times p 12. June 7,1976. 11 "Media Reference Guide - Offensive Terms To Avoid". GLAAD. Retrieved 2012-05-24. 12 Cocks, H. A. '''Sporty' Girls and 'Artistic' Boys: Friendship, Illicit Sex, and the British 'Companionship' Advertisement, 1913-1928", Journal of the History of SexualityVolume 11, Number 3, July 2002, pp. 457-482. 13 Selby, Jr., Hubert "Last Exit To Brooklyn" NY: Grove Press, 1988 p. 23 copyright 1964
www.ijmer.in
240
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
animated TV series The Flintstones, whereby viewers are assured that they will "have a gay old time." Similarly, the 1966 Herman's Hermits song "No Milk Today", which became a Top 10 hit in the UK and a Top 40 hit in the U.S. and included the lyric "No milk today, it was not always so. The company was gay, we'd turn night into day"14 In June 96, the headline of the review of the Beatles' Sgt. Pepper's Lonely Hearts Club Band album in the British daily newspaper The Times stated, "The Beatles revive hopes of progress in pop music with their gay new Lp"15 Yet in the same year, The Kinks recorded "David Watts"16. Ostensibly about schoolboy envy, the song also operated as an in-joke, as related in Jon Savage's "The Kinks: The Official Biography", because the song took its name from a homosexual promoter they'd encountered who'd had romantic designs on songwriter Ray Davies' teenage brother; and the lines "he is so gay and fancy free" attest to the ambiguity of the word's meaning at that time, with the second meaning evident only for those in the know17. As late as 1970, the first episode of The Mary Tyler Moore Show has the demonstrably straight Mary Richards' downstairs neighbor, Phyllis, breezily declaiming that Mary is, at age 30, still "young and gay." There is little doubt that the homosexual sense is a development of the word's traditional meaning, as described above. It has nevertheless been claimed that gay stands for "Good As You", but there is no evidence for this: it is a folk etymology backronym18. Sexual orientation, identity, behavior
14
"The Lyrics Library - Herman's Hermits - No Milk Today". "The Beatles revive hopes of progress in pop music with their gay new LP". The Times(London). 2 June 2007. Retrieved 3 May 2010. 16 "Kinks Song List". Kindakinks.net. Retrieved 2012-05-24. 17 Savage, Jon "The Kinks: The Official Biography" London: Faber and Faber, 1984 pp.94-96 18 "Global Oneness Encyclopedia: Gay"
15
www.ijmer.in
241
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
The sexual orientation "describes the pattern of sexual attraction, behavior and identity e.g. homosexual (aka, gay, lesbian), bisexual and heterosexual(aka straight)". It says, "There is no consensus among scientists about the exact reasons that an individual develops a heterosexual, bisexual, gay, or lesbian orientation. Although much research has examined the possible genetic, hormonal, developmental, social, and cultural influences on sexual orientation, no findings have emerged that permit scientists to conclude that sexual orientation is determined by any particular factor or factors. Many think that nature and nurture both play complex roles.19" According to Rosario, Schrimshaw, Hunter, Braun (2006), "the development of a lesbian, gay or bisexual (LGB) sexual identity is a complex and often difficult process. Unlike members of other minority groups (e.g., ethnic and racial minorities), most LGB individuals are not raised in a community of similar others from whom they learn about their Identity and who reinforce and support that identity. Rather, LGB individuals are often raised in communities that are either ignorant of or openly hostile towards homosexuality.20” The British gay rights activist Peter Tatchell has argued that the term gay is merely a cultural expression which reflects the current status of homosexuality within a given society, and claiming that "Queer, gay, homosexual ... in the long view, they are all just temporary identities. One day, we will not need them at all.21"
19
"What causes a person to have a particular sexual orientation?". APA. Retrieved 201205-24. 20 Rosario, M., Schrimshaw, E., Hunter, J., & Braun, L. (2006, February). Sexual identity development among lesbian, gay, and bisexual youths: Consistency and change over time. Journal of Sex Research, 43(1), 46-58. Retrieved April 4, 2009, from PsyclNFO database. 21 Tatchell, Peter (27 November 2006). "Just a phase". London: Guardian Unlimited. Retrieved 3 May 2010
www.ijmer.in
242
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
If a person engages in same-sex sexual encounters but does not self-identify as gay, terms such as 'closeted', 'discreet', or 'bi-curious' may be applied. Conversely, a person may identify as gay without engaging in homosexual sex. Possible choices include identifying as gay socially while choosing to be celibate or while anticipating a first homosexual experience. Further, a bisexual person can also identify as "gay" but others might consider gay and bisexual to be mutually exclusive. There are some who are drawn to the same-sex, and may not have sex, and also not identify as gay; these could have the term 'asexual' applied, even though an 'asexual' generally can mean no attraction, and includes heterosexual attraction that is not sufficient to engage in sex, or where the sex act is not desirable, even though titillation may occur. CONCLUSION Thus starting in the mid-1980s in the United States, a conscious effort was under way within what was then called the gay community, to add the term lesbian to the name of all gay organizations that catered to both male and female homosexuals, and to use the terminology of gay and lesbian, or lesbian/gay when referring to that community. So, organizations like the National Gay Task Force became the National Gay and Lesbian Task Force. For many ardent feminist lesbians, it was also important that the L come first lest an L following a G become another symbol of male dominance over women22, although other women prefer the usage gay woman. In the 1990s, this was followed by another equally concerted push to include the terminology specifically pointing out the inclusion of bisexual, transgender, intersex, and other people, reflecting the intra-community debate as to whether these other sexual minorities were part of the same human rights movement. Most news organizations have formally adopted variations 22
Lesbian Ethics, pp. 13-21.
www.ijmer.in
243
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 4.527; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 5, ISSUE 10(5), OCTOBER 2016
of this use, following the example and preference of the organizations, as reflected in their press releases and public communications. Some still disregard those developments and just use gay, or gay community as synonyms for LGBT community. It causes offence, and possibly harm to those of the minorities whose issues are not male, or of sexual orientation, and may be heterosexual, to be erased in that manner. Proper usage would be when the speaker is referring only to homosexual men.
www.ijmer.in
244
